Home
        JVC CU-VD40U DVD Recorder User Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                             SIGNAL GND       E Input ports  D  ALARM IN 1 to 8  alarm input terminals 1 to 8    Alarm recording is activated when signals are input to these  terminals     D  EMERGENCY  emergency input terminal    Recording is activated in all cameras when a signal is input to this  terminal      33   ALARM RESET  alarm reset input terminal    Output from the alarm output terminal is stopped when a signal is  input during output of the Alarm Out signals    Turns off the  ALARM  indicator   on the unit  Press and hold down  to turn off the  WARNING  indicator       D  EXT REC IN  external recording input terminal    Recording in all cameras is started or stopped by an external signal   Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video signal is  being input          OPE ON OFF  Operate ON OFF terminal    Switches between OPERATE ON or OFF when a signal is input    t  Page 30        Note       Input ports    to  amp    will not operate when the main menu is  displayed  Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the  main menu is displayed           E Output ports  G  COMMON  signal ground terminal    This is a common ground terminal  Connect it to the signal ground  terminal on the connected device   This can be used when there  are insufficient common ground terminals        DP  ALARM OUT  alarm output terminal  Outputs a signal when recording is starte
2.                                                                  Set   ENTER                                               Menu Set   HOME   ENTER                 155    Others       PTZ Camera Control   continued     E Pan Tilt     Tilts the camera upwards     Tilts the camera downwards    Pans the camera to the right      Pans the camera to the left    MOGE                E Zoom  t   Zooms out  4   Zooms in  E iris  t   Opens the iris       Closes the iris  i Focus   f    Sets the focus to a distant position   4    Focuses automatically        Sets the focus to a closer position  i Speed    For setting the movement speed of the PTZ action to eight different  levels   1 represents the slowest speed     E Preset    Position Selection   Select HOME or a different position       For moving to the position selected using    Position Selection      For registering a position selected using       Register          Move                             Position Selection as the current position  E Scene  Scene     Selection   For selecting a scene between A to H   Zi   For setting a scene selected using Scene  ENER      Selection  E Night Mode       n   Turns on the night mode          ER   Turns off the night mode             136                                                 E Menu  I   Displays the PTZ camera menu  ENTER    Selects the PTZ camera menu  t   PTZ camera   s menu  Up cursor   4   PTZ camera   s menu  Down cursor    gt    PTZ camera   s menu  Right cursor   4m   PTZ came
3.                 Delete u    IPaddress          device or this unit  select the audio file from  the  Flash memory  or  Audio files  list   followed by clicking the  Delete  button  A  confirmation message appears  and the  selected audio file is deleted              Item Description    Flash The G711u law monaural format audio files  memory in the root folder of the USB memory device    connected to this unit are displayed           Add  Stop     Select one audio file from the  Flash memory   list  and press  Add  to copy the audio file  inside the  Flash memory  to this unit  When  audio file copy is in progress  the  Add  button  switches to a  Stop  button  To stop copying of  the audio file  press the  Stop  button     Memo    e If an audio file with the same name  already exists on this unit  a confirmation  message asking whether you want to  overwrite the existing file appears    e You can add up to a maximum of 100  audio files to this unit  An error message  appears when the number of files exceeds  100  and copying cannot be performed           Test pray   Stop     For performing test play of audio files using a  camera that supports bidirectional audio  sound or this unit    Select an audio file from the  Flash memory   or  Audio files  list  and press the  Test pray   Stop   button  Select the camera to use for  the test from the  Audio playing for  list     When test play is in progress  the  Test pray   button switches to a  Stop  button  To stop test  play whil
4.                 Error  Check       This is usually not selected  Use it only if you  suspect there is abnormality in the hard disk   or if you want to check the data structure of  the disk  Recovery of large capacity hard  disks may take several hours  Recovery of  the hard disk in the system is impossible   Recovery will be executed the next time the  system is started    Recovery may not be possible when the  volume to recover is currently in use  In this  case  a message indicating    Error check  cannot be performed now  Do you want to  schedule a recovery during the next system  startup     will be displayed  Select whether  you want to click the  Cancel  button and  retry by clicking the  Recover  button again   or whether you want to click the  OK  button  to execute recovery the next time the system  is started              116             Item Description             Details Click this option to display the  Advanced   screen   You can specify the settings when archiving    to NAS or the built in HDD on this screen                    NAS User Settings  User name For specifying the user name for connecting  to NAS   Password For specifying the password for connecting  to NAS   NAS Drive  Add Enter the IP address of the NAS to be    connected to the  Address   and click the   Add  button     Example      192 168 0 200          NAS Device   s IP Address     Shared Name       Del Select the NAS to delete in  List   and click  the  Del  button           Auto Archive  Enab
5.             9 Channel Recording No Audio Recording Additional HDD  1 TB x 1 Unit                                 Hour   Image Data Image Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 10  Picture VGA 32 101  Quality 24 135  Settings 16 203  10 325  QVGA 27 120  15 216  8 407  5 651                                       9 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording Additional HDD  1 TB x 1 Unit                                 Hour   Image Data Image Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 10  Picture VGA 32 101  Quality 24 134  Settings 16 201  10 321  QVGA 27 119  15 215  8 400  5 634                                     Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format                       24 to 168 169 to 720  1dayto1week 1 week to 1 1 month to 3  month months       3 months or  longer       Note     e Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10    according to the condition of the hard disk and the images  recorded      Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk        145                      Others    Default Value List       Scheduler  Scheduler Setting       Page 53         Factory Settings                                        Online  Always Online   Enable speedup  Always Offline   E mail  Always Offline   Patrolling  Always Offline   Camera Settings  Edit Device      Settings     Page 56    PTZ Camera Section   Some of the connected cameras are Pna Tilt Zoom cameras  Not Selected   Came
6.            2nnnnenennennennennnnennennnn 140   Contiguring  NAS  44a  141   Recording Time Schedule  VR N1600U E     nsss 142   Default Value List    en 146      Troubleshooting    een 150   Specifications  u    ine 152  VR N1600UJE  2  hassen 152  VR N900U 4 2    ri 153    Getting Started       Precautions for Proper Use  of this Product    Locations of Storage and Use    Do not place this product at the following locations     Doing so may cause this product to malfunction or break   down      Hot or cold places beyond the allowable operating  temperature range  5  C to 40  C      Humid places beyond the allowable operating humidity  range  30 RH to 80 RH   no condensation    e Places that emit a strong magnetic field  such as near  transformers and motors   e Places near devices that emit radio waves  such as  transceivers and mobile phones   e Places with considerable dust and sand   e Places with strong vibrations   e Places where water droplets may be formed  such as  window sides   e Places with considerable vapor and oil  such as kitchens   e Places that emit radiation  X rays  and corrosive gases      Using this unit and the cable that is connected to it near  places where strong radio waves or magnetic fields  such  as near radios  TVs  transformers  and monitors  are  emitted may cause noises in the video images or color  changes     Handling Precautions    Do not stack the devices on one another during use     Heat and noise from the devices may cause the unit to 
7.            Hinweis zum Netzanschlu  kabel    Zu Ihrer Sicherheit lesen Sie bitte das folgende sorgf  ltig   Verwenden Sie ausschlie  lich ein in Ihrem Land zul  ssiges Netzkabel        F  r Kontinentaleuropa  Nicht f  r den Gebrauch in Gro  britannien     Nur f  r Gro  britannien                                                       Tene SICHERHEITSHINWEISE    5    10   11     12     13     Alle Warnungen auf dem Produkt sowie in der Betriebsanleitung sind unbedingt zu beachten    Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker dieses Systems aus der Steckdose  bevor Sie das Ger  t reinigen  Benutzen Sie  keine Fl  ssigreiniger und keine Spr  hreiniger  Verwenden Sie zum Reinigen lediglich ein leicht angefeuchtetes  Tuch    Benutzen Sie keine Zubeh  rteile  die nicht vom Hersteller empfohlenen werden  diese k  nnen Gefahren und  Risiken verursachen    Benutzen Sie das Ger  t nicht in der N  he von Wasser und sonstigen Fl  ssigkeiten   beispielsweise nicht in  der N  he von Badewannen  Handwaschbecken  Sp  len  Waschbecken  nicht in feuchten Kellern  nicht in der  N  he von Schwimmbecken  und so weiter    Stellen Sie das Ger  t nicht auf instabile Wagen  St  nder oder Tische  Das Ger  t kann herunterfallen   ernsthafte Verletzungen bei Kindern und Erwachsenen hervorrufen und auch selbst schwer besch  digt  werden  Benutzen Sie ausschlie  lich Wagen oder St  nder  die vom Hersteller empfohlen oder mit dem Ger  t  verkauft wurden  Bei der Aufstellung im Regal halten Sie sich an die Anweisungen des H
8.          Network Settings for Video Device          IP address IP address or DNS host name of the device   Use DNS Select this check box to identify the device  host name using the DNS host name instead of its IP    address        Default Http  Port    Select this check box to allow HTTP traffic to  the device through the default port  Port 80    To use another port  deselect the check box  and specify the port number in the field to the  left of the check box        Default Ftp  Port    Select this check box to allow FTP traffic to  the device through the default port  Port 21    To use another port  deselect the check box  and specify the port number in the field to the  left of the check box        Root  Password       Enter the password for logging into the  device using the root account  also known as  Admin or Administrator account      Memo    e If you are using VN C625U VN C655U   an error message does not appear if you  have entered a wrong password and  clicked OK  but access to the camera may  fail  such as not being able to view the live  images                    OK Cancel          Confirms or cancels the settings        8     Applications       PTZ Camera Settings   COM1 COM2     The  Camera Settings  screen enables you to specify of the information on cameras  The number of configurable parameters available on the   Camera Settings  screen may be limited if the camera does not come with the PTZ features or if the device connected to the network encoder   IP vid
9.         119    Applications          The following operations are possible when you connect this unit to  a computer       Viewing live images on the computer  e Controlling network cameras on the computer  e Viewing recorded images on the computer    Note    e Connect the computer to the LAN2 terminal network     e Settings for cameras connected to the LAN1 network cannot be  specified from a computer connected to the LAN2 network           eee    System requirements       Item Description       Operating System   Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional   Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server   Windows XP Professional  32  and 64 bit  or  Windows Server 2003  32  and 64 bit              CPU Intel Pentium4 or higher   Xeon  recommended for large views   minimum 2 4  GHz   RAM Minimum 512 MB  1 GB recommended for  large views    Network Ethernet  100 Mbps or higher recommended       Graphics Card AGP or PCI Express  minimum 1024 x 768   1280 x 1024 recommended   16 bit colors or    higher  Hard Disk Space   At least 50 MB free    Microsoft  NET Framework 2 0 and DirectX  9 0 or later versions  Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0          Software                   Computer Network Settings    The following is an example for building a small scale LAN on  Windows XP Professional using the default settings of this unit    All screens shown below are Windows XP SP2 configuration  screens      120       T Click the  Start  button  followed by clicking   Control Panel           2 Click  
10.        F    350    KO                                                                                                                                                             420  a  EU U EH  100   amp  HOB hes one  Bagi a a EEIE i  i  elzesl   O50 MOS  mm     x The specifications and appearance of this unit may be  modified for improvement without prior notice     153    NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER  VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U    JVC       2008 Victor Company of Japan  Limited    LST0728 001B    
11.        Patrol scheme        Setup of PTZ Patrol schedule  he    Stay at each t schedule  In seconds              complete  in seconds   Motion  3       r    PTZ Patrol action on motion     7 Disable patroling schedule if motion is detected        Setup PTZ Patrolling  Screen                                  Item Description   D New For adding a new patrol scheme to the   Patrol scheme  list    2  Copy For creating a new patrol scheme based on  an existing one  Select the patrol scheme to  copy in the  Patrol scheme  list beforehand    3  Rename For changing the name of an existing patrol  scheme  Select the patrol scheme to rename  in the  Patrol scheme  list beforehand    4  Remove For deleting an existing patrol scheme   Select the patrol scheme to delete in the   Patrol scheme  list beforehand           3 Select the preset positions you want to use in    the  Preset Positions  list  and click the  _       button     e Doing so copies the selected preset positions to the   Patrolling list        A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol  scheme      The camera will move between the preset positions in the  sequence shown in the  Patrolling list   starting from the  top position    e To change the sequence of preset positions in the   Patrolling list  list  select a preset position name  and click  the Up Down buttons    e To remove a preset position from the  Patrolling list   select  the preset position and click the _     button     23    Applications      
12.        Searching Recorded Image Using   Sequence   Sequences refers to sequences of images that are recorded when   an event or motion is detected  Each sequence contains a list of the   recorded images    1 Double click the  Sequence  bar on the  Browse   screen     Sequence  Sequence Bar         AN AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3 a  a d   7 24 2007 11 16 40 AM  6 sec       d   7 24 2007 11 16 26 AM    sec      dh 7 24 2007 11 14 33 AM  34 sec    E dy 7 24 2007 11 14 11 AM  14 sec       d   7 24 2007 11 11 34 AM  13 sec       lt   gt     Get Sequences    Z  Preview                 Browse  Screen                2 Click  Get Sequence     e A list of 20 images each prior to and following the display  time appears    e  f the  Preview Image  check box is selected  you are able  to preview the images by placing the mouse pointer over  the sequence in the list     3 Click a sequence in the list      Display of all the images in the view changes according to  the date time of the selected sequence     Memo    e Clicking the expand icon     next to a sequence in the list will  show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in  the sequence as well as the exact date and time of the motion  detection or event that triggered the recording     Note    e Depending on     seconds pre post recordings on motion event     c  Page 57   a consecutive number of sequences may  sometimes be integrated into one sequence                 Searching Recorded Image from the Alert  List   A list of
13.       Joystick Setup  Customizing Joystick Settings       Page 140                                            Disable all joysticks  Not Selected   Axis Setup  Invert Absolute Action   X Axis  Not Selected   Not Selected  PTZ Zoom  PTZ Tilt   PTZ Pan     No Action   Y Axis  Not Selected   Not Selected  PTZ Zoom   PTZ Tilt   PTZ Pan    No Action   Z Axis  Not Selected   Not Selected   PTZ Zoom   PTZ Tilt  PTZ Pan    No Action   Button Setup   Buttons 1 to 12  No Action              147    Others    Default Value List   continued        Unit Settings  Unit Setting   c  Page 69                                               Password  None   Auto Logon  Selected   Live   Live viewing Auto Start  Selected   Error Report   Dialog  Selected   Mail  Selected   Record Control   ON at startup  Selected   Mail Server   SMTP Server Port 25   POP Server Port 110   SMTP Authentication  NONE J SMTP Authentication POP before    SMTP       Emergency Record       Time of Record    NONE  30seconds  60seconds  5minutes   10minutes 10minutes Continue       Encode Mode  VR N900U        Encode Mode    Variable File Size  Average File Size    Constant File Size                                                          Interpolate  Selected    Serial  VR N900U    Speed 1200 1800 2400 4800  9600  19200 4800   19200 38400   Data Lenght 78    Parity  NONEJ ODD EVEN   Stop Bit  1 2   OS Settings  OS Setting       Page 72    Network Adapter Interface Name   Intel   82566DM Gigabit Network  LAN1  Camera Netw
14.       T Click  Camera Recording Administator   Archive  Setup                            AXIS 207W  Camera   AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 1   VC   Camera             Set al Clear all Set all paths                 Archive Setup  Screen    2 Specify the number of days for storing the archived  data in  Delet databases in the backup directory older  then     days     3 Use the  Add  and  Delete  buttons to specify the time  to create archives everyday    4 Select the camera for which archive is to be created    Note      5  Automatic path  selection    The archiving location is automatically  selected  The drive with a large amount  of free space is selected    Select this check box    If the check box is deselected  the   Save to  button appears    Deselect this check box if you are  specifying a drive to save the archive  data to  such as NAS        Save to       This button appears when the   Automatic path selection  check box is  deselected  Specify the archive location  for each camera  Enter the archive  location if you are specifying a drive to  save the archive data to  such as NAS     Note        e  f you change the archive path after  applying the setting  playback of  previously archived data will fail              Select cameras  for which the  archiving  function should  apply    If you have selected the  Enable  Archiving  check box  a list of cameras  that enable archiving appears    To specify the archiving settings for a  specific camera  select the check box  next to 
15.      9    The software on the device includes Windows Update Agent      WUA      functionality that may enable your device to connect  to and access updates      Windows Updates      from a server installed with the required server component  Without limiting  any other disclaimer in this Micrososoft Software License Terms or any EULA accompanying a Windows Update  you  acknowledge and agree that no warranty is provided by MS  Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates with respect to any  Windows Update that you install or attempt to install on your device     Product Support    Contact JVC for support options  Refer to the support number provided with the device    Backup Copy    You may make one backup copy of the software  You may use it only to reinstall the software on the device   Proof Of License     If you acquired the software on the device  or on a disc or other media  a genuine Certificate of Authenticity label with a  genuine copy of the software identifies licensed software  To be valid  this label must be affixed to the device  or included on or  in JVC    s software packaging  If you receive the label separately  it is not valid  You should keep the label on the device or  packaging to prove that you are licensed to use the software    To identify genuine Microsoft software  see http   www howtotell com    Transfer to a Third Party     You may transfer the software only with the device  the Certificate of Authenticity label  and these license terms directly to 
16.     46  GOntents u    enable Bin ae 8 Listening to Audio Sound            uucessenneneenseennensennennnennennen 47  Precautions for Proper Use of this Product                            10 Writing Images Audio Sound to CDs  DVDs and  Part Names and Functions  VR N1600UJE  aussen 12 Other Media  Export      nnmnneesnernennennennnnn nennen nennen nennen nenn 47  Part Names and Functions  VR N900U     u    16 Deleting Temporary Files  Operation on the Unit                50  Rear Panel Terminals tee a Ziele 20 Deleting Data from a CD RW  Operation on the Unit        50  Camera Control Terminal  VR N900U        nunee 21 Writing Data to a USB Memory Device  Differences when operating VR N1600U E and VR N900U       21  Operation on the Unit         nmermermrneernennnnnn nennen nennen 50  Mounting to a Rack           nunsessenennnsennnnnnennennnnnnennnnnnnnennnn 21 Operation from a Surveillance Computer nn 50  Operation LOCK  gt na aen racer dey E Ea a E 22 Printing Recorded Images    During Initial Startup 0    cee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeneeneeeteeteees 22 OPENING SONST ARE COMPRI ee  gt   Recording Camera Images         nnnnernernn nennen nennen nennen nen 52  Preparation Recording Modes pia ar 52  System Connection Example           nnsnsensnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnn 26 Ba Operation Surning POMEL FONTS een  gt   Clock Display ar ne ana 27 selling ne Recoraing ent MOG BERNIE    Performance Meter              ceccscceceseeseseeeesereneeeeeseneaseeeeensetees 27 Spleet he Mantel Recor
17.     Use the 4 screws  M5 x 11 mm  supplied to fasten this unit  to the rack        Rack Mount    Bracket ae           4 Screws        Note     e Do not place any object on this unit when it is mounted to the  rack  Doing so may cause it to lose balance and drop or fall   hence resulting in injuries or damages      When mounting more than one of this unit to the rack  make sure  to mount each at a distance that is at least equivalent to one  unit      When remounting the removed foot  make sure to use same  screws  M3x6 mm   Using a longer screw may cause  malfunction        21    Getting Started       Operation Lock    VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U is equipped with an operation  lock feature to prevent the system from being turned off accidentally  as well as unauthorized recording operations     Setting Operation Lock      Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press the   KEY  button at the same time    e Operation is locked  The  LOCK  indicator lights up when  in the operation lock mode     Canceling Operation Lock    1  When in the operation lock mode  Press the   KEY  button while holding down the   FUNCTION  button    e Operation lock is canceled     The light of the  LOCK  indicator goes off      LOCK  Indicator    VR N1600U E                                                              FUNCTION   button  KEY  Button     LOCK  Indicator VR N900U                                FUNCTION     button  KEY  Button    22          During Initial Startup    Perform language 
18.    Memo       The settings for  Days to log  under  Image Server Setting     Log Files   Item     as well as  Days to log  under  Audit Log   Item 9  are  disabled    e  Camera Record Setting   General Settings     Logfile Settings  e Page 106  is enabled         9    Applications       Main Menu List  continued     Auto Detect Setting    This section enables you to assign an IP address to each camera and configure various auto detect settings   For procedures on using the Auto Detect feature  refer to  Auto Detect Settings      Page 113      IP Lease IP Infomation     Enable O Disable IP CH MAKER MODEL    ODelete IP Infomation    IP Lease Parameter    Start Address  192 168  Unit  20Units  SubnetMask  255 255    Gateway  192 168    DNS Server  Primary  192 168    Secondry  168    Domain Name        Reserve MAG Address  Lease Time Limit d r       No O Yes 48Hours v    Client       Only Camera O Any Client    Add ODel    Analoglnput  ACH w   NTSG    x VR N900U only    80          Reference       Item Preset Values Description  Page     IP Lease   Enable For configuring the function to assign IP addresses to each network     Page 113  Disable ie    Memo          In order to assign an IP address of the network camera using the  IP Lease feature  you need to enable the DHCP of the network  camera  For procedures to enable the DHCP of the network  camera  refer to the  INSTRUCRTIONS  of the network camera      If a network uses a multiple number of this product  enable  IP  Lease 
19.    NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER  VR N1600U instrucrions  VR N1600E   VR N900U    o  LIVE BROWSE                   NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER VR N1600    REC                                              OPERATE    D SELECT   am     o  REC CONTROL                                                        PTZPRESET                                                                         VR N1600U E                                              BIVCH WARNING a     u    LIVE BROWSE 274 37             l m 900    D   S     Saum _         gt   SELECT Bm     e   a  ooo    PTZ PRESET m FE  oO C    lt                                                                                    gt   REC CONTROL                                           FUNCTION SEARCH KEY ALARMCLEAR REC STOP STOP  PB  PLAY    moe ome O  ONORG                                                                       VR N900U       Powered by Milestone  Please read the following before getting started     Thank you for purchasing this JVC product   Before operating this unit  please read the instructions  carefully to ensure the best possible performance        For Customer Use   Enter below the Serial No  which is located on the  body     Retain this information for future reference   Model No  VR N1600U VR N900U  Serial No     LST0728 001B       IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS       Nes    OO     Read all of these instructions    Save these instructions for later use    All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adh
20.    Specify this to maintain a constant image quality     Memo     Note that maximum recording time varies when recording JPEG  files with this option as the file size increases or decreases           Average File Size    Multiple JPEG files are encoded to reach the designated size as  average size    Constant File Size    Each JPEG file is encoded to reach the designated size  The  processing load is heavy with    Constant File Size     which  decreases the maximum processing frame rate to approximately  one quarter of the value     Memo    e Specify the designated size using the  Quality  bar on the   Configure Device  screen under  Camera Record Setting     c  Page 58              Interpolate      Select check box    Do not select  check box    Select this check box to eliminate the comb shaped noise  noise  that appears jagged  of the moving object             Mail Send List       List             Enables you to specify the mail recipient if you have selected    Mail     in the  Error Report  item     To add a new recipient  type the e mail  address in the entry field and click the  Add  button  To remove an e           Input   mail address from the notification list  select the required e mail  address in the  List  and click  Delete    Close Closes the Unit Setting screen                  7d       Applications       Main Menu List  continued     OS Setting    Enables you to specify settings related to the OS  including network  time  and volume settings   You may need to
21.    The layout of the selected view appears     2 Click the     mark to the left of  Server  under   System Overview     e A list of available cameras appears            Cameras               2 5 Serer        1   AXIS 207W  Camera 1  Camera    2   IVC   Camera 2       3   AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3  List  3 Carouser    Hotspot  a  Html Page  A  Image  EB Matrix         Screen Setup  Screen             3 Select the camera you want to add from the list   and drag the camera name over the screen of  the view on the right    e An image from the selected camera appears together with  the camera name      Repeat the procedure for each camera that you want to  add     Memo     Adjusting Camera Settings      Select the camera you want to adjust on the   Screen Setup  screen    2 Select  Properties        er    i Properties   Camera Name  Image Quality   Full       Frame Rate   Unlimited  IPIX Split Mode     z  Maintain Image Aspect Ratio          Update on Motion    Sound on Motion Detection   Always off  Sound on Event     Always off    Apply To All             3 Adjust the following camera settings  accordingly             Item Description   D Camera Displays the name of the selected camera   Name  This is a read only field      Image Enables you to adjust the image resolution    Quality and picture quality during viewing  Select   Full  at all times             Images from a total of 16 cameras can be simultaneously  displayed   VR N1600U E      Images from a total of 9 cameras can be 
22.    unformat disk    in HDD Utility to perform    initialization     The confirmation message will only appear during  recording   ODefrag  eee a  x Olnitialize  OError Check  Quick Format  k d          5 Check the entry in the  Volume  field  and click  the  Initialize  button       The external hard disk drive is initialized    e Check to ensure that the  Volume  field is set to  unformat  disk    unpartition disk  and  unknown partition   Selecting  any other volume may result in the deletion of recorded  data     Note        e Consult your nearest JVC dealer or service center for details on  the type of external hard disk drive that can be used    e When an additional hard disk is connected  several seconds of  the recorded image may be lost during archiving      Note that playing back video recorded in an external HDD  simultaneously on this unit and multiple clients may cause delay  in the playback of video images and audio sound    This is not a malfunction and there is no problem with the  recorded images  Normal playback will be restored when  simultaneous playback stops or when the number of devices  playing back at the same time decreases     Memo          It is recommended that a UPS be used to ensure stable  operation of the system      You are unable to view recorded images on the computer by  disconnecting the external hard disk from this unit and  connecting it to the computer        NAS    NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network   In th
23.   Alem i falre       Aim  rene   Aub fies SF ale  dem alee    em S rene  Alm 3 rere     audio payne tor Patteos Audio files copy  Alema rene    I  NVR Camara 17 121001  Airm ile  Em ene    lem 8 fallire    Password setting  fiama rene    Multi Mode       Communication setting  TER er  Ube EVENT       Setting copy    Push To Tak  ALARMNI          B           c  Page 76        8 ImageServer Administrator                                                           Server Configuration  Name   Server  port   50   c  Page 84       Page 80  seine tvs    Outside IP Address   2 Camera Recording Administrator  Device Manager Okrabie O disable MAC GH MAKER MODEL TEME paN Local IP Ranges   aes ER exszarw 92 168 05  res  ODelete IP Infomation Max  number of cients   11  E BA maszizptz 102 158 02  Oup  ee Be User administration  R Der rer   Scheer efine Usemame ard Passwort er Set  ie we 27003 X z  Odom Def U rd Password  User Setup   Ful access for al users     General Settings  F ee i  Resbict usor accoss     Osenar mom  m    DNS Server LogFies  Ach sorup  Prins  won    Seals  Secon   i 0 m  Domain Name  Gar Bea   Nor  Enable auc Loggng  I  MAC as  lime Limit Daysto log   0 For infirite   Matrix  Oma OYes a  NETSE  be TEM   P Mnimum Logging Interval   seconds      Cony canera O any Cikrt Oadid  ODel In Sequence Tmespar    seconds   Serent Events  Language support and 6 Encoding  OK  Cance  language   Wester  European   e0 6553 7  YO corer  ee   amp  ana                              Unit S
24.   H R JVC VN C625  192 168 0 26     tur wmunsos 11192168025     Scheduler    ak  6  Camera    H s  JVC WN EdJ  192 168 0 5        Service Manager       Add Device       General Settings       Archive Setup       YO Setup       Matrix       Event Buttons       Generic Events       YO Control                    Camera Recording Administator  Screen       Camera Settings for  JVC VN C625  Camera 3    Speedup Settings Live Settings  Desired framerate   Desired framerate      e frame s  per 0 13 Second s  btw  images    Same as recording      Same as speedup  Recording Settings    Desired framerate   Camera Monitor Setup                e    frame s  per 0 13 Second s  btw  images    I Enable speedup A  r f r  r I I Disabled   When to store images in database      C Always      Never     Conditionally     5 seconds prfpost recordings on motionfevent          108000 Clear Database       I Archive automatically when database is full       Database path   Di Recordings        In case of database failure the Following action should be taken   archive  no repair     Motion Detection Settings Exclude Regions Settings       Motion Detection      Motion Color     Exclude Regions  Region Color          Image Quality      Event Notifications    Outputs    PTZ Preset Positions     id   PTZ Preset Positions     Button                    Camera Settings  Screen    Note     The preset position may be displaced by a few degrees for some  cameras                Video images and audio sound are not
25.   My Patrol    New Copy Rename Remove            Setup of PTZ Patr        ES  t to complete  in seconds   Motion 3                      5 seconds has passed without detection of motion                2 Select the conditions for resuming PTZ  patrolling    e When a specific time interval has lapsed after the first  detected motion  regardless of whether any subsequent  motion is detected   e When a specific time interval has lapsed after the last  detected motion    3 Specify the selected condition in units of  seconds    E PTZ Scanning    For cameras that support PTZ scanning  you can enable this  feature in the  Setup of PTZ Scanning  section to select a PTZ  scanning speed     Note    e To define a patrol scheme  you must specify at least two preset  positions  You must also specify the period for which the patrol  scheme is enabled in  Camera Record Setting   Scheduler        e Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or  when an event occurs  When this occurs  you need to specify the  duration  seconds  before resuming patrol in  Camera Record  Setting     General Settings   Patrolling Settings   The settings in  this section are applied to all PTZ cameras installed in the  system  The default setting is 30 seconds              Camera Input Output Port  and Events    The input output port is the input output terminal that is found on  each device registered with this unit  You can register the input port  as  Input events   and the output port as  Outp
26.   PTZ Preset Positions for Device  Name  window  1  Page 90     PTZ Preset Positions for  AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3    PTZ View                         Preset Positions    jositions from device  Set Position  Edit Name   Test    Delete    vos  Preset Position on Events  N Goto preset on event    Patrolling       Setup     Cancel   PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  Window       2 Move the camera and determine the position  using the  PTZ View     3 Select an item in the  Preset Positions  list to  register the preset position to       The position at the top of the list corresponds to Preset  Position 1      The number of preset positions that can be registered  may differ according to the camera in use     4 Click the  Set Position  button and name the  preset position    Preset Position    Enter the name you wish to call the preset position         Undefined    Cancel       5 To define another preset position  repeat Steps  2t04    92    Moving to Preset Positions by Events    This feature enables the PTZ camera to move automatically to a  preset position when an event occurs     1 Display the  PTZ Preset Positions for Device  Name  window  t  Page 90     2 Select the  Goto preset on event  check box  under  Preset Position on Events     3 Click the  Setup     button    PTZ Preset Positions for  AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3       PTZ View                4  Ale  v fa                Preset Positions   7 Use preset positions from device       Set Position    A2  Undefined a  A3  Und
27.   Rotate the shuttle dial during playback or when playback is  paused to start fast forward  fast reverse or slow playback     Shuttle Dial  External     Jog Dial  Internal        Jog Shuttle dial    Memo      The playback speed that is indicated during fast forward or fast  reverse playback by rotating the shuttle dial is an approximate  value  The speed may differ depending on the conditions  such  as the playback mode  multi view  single view  and the recording  mode  motion detection  recorded frame rate            E Jog Playback      Rotate the jog dial to play back frame by frame      Rotate the dial clockwise to play back a single frame in the  forward direction  and rotate the dial counterclockwise to play  back a single frame in the reverse direction      Release the dial to pause the playback  However  when frames  are played back successively in the forward or reverse direction   playback may continue momentarily after the jog dial is released    Note       The jog dial is only enabled when a camera has been selected      When the playback speed is adjusted or when playing back at  high speed during recording  the frame rate of the recording may  decrease  Check the performance meter while adjusting the  playback speed to ensure that the display does not turn red                The  SKIP  buttons are only enabled when a camera has been  selected    e During simultaneous recording and playback  an    After  Database End    message may appear as playback catches up  
28.   Setting the hot spot in a larger position  such  as in  1  of the  1 7  view  displays an enlarged image when the hot  spot is selected       Displaying the  Screen Setup  Screen    2 Click and drag the  Hotspot  icon in the  System  Overview  section to the position that you want  to set in the  Views          ey ere pean e        3   AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3  Ea Carousel     9  Mimi Page       E  Image        EB Matrix        Screen Setup  Screen           Hotspot     3 Release the mouse button at the position    4 Select the preset position in  Hotspot  and  specify its properties in the  Properties  section    Memo    e Using the  Hotspot  function enables you to use a low frame rate  for other cameras and a high frame rate for the hot spot      The orange border indicates that the position is used for a  hotspot      When the hot spot is set in multiple views and the view is  switched  the camera image displayed in the view before  switching continues to be displayed in the hot spot window in the  view after switching              Item Description       Enables you to adjust the image resolution and  picture quality during viewing  Select    Full    at  all times      D Image         Frame This is the viewing frame rate    Rate Select  Unlimited   default value  same as live  settings    Medium   25   of the frame rate   or   Low   5   of the frame rate   depending on the  frame rate specified in  Live Settings         Page 56  on the  Camera Settings  screen           M
29.   USB memory    VR N900U    e To save the preset data after you have selected  Remove Flash  Memory   remove the flash memory device from the serial  terminal and insert it again  The flash memory inserted will be  automatically detected           111    Applications       Flash Memory Utility   continued     E Reading Preset Data    This section describes procedures for reading the preset data from  the flash memory       Insert the flash memory device into the   SERIAL  terminal on the front  rear  panel    2 Select  Load Setting Data     e If data is stored on the flash memory device  a list of data  stored in the device will appear in the preset data list       The  Flash memory cannot be detected  message may  appear in some cases  In this case  wait for about 30  seconds and select  Load Setting Data  again      Preset data that is stored on this unit is indicated by    My  Machine    at the beginning  Data stored on other NVR  units is displayed as    Other Machine     This is followed by  a pair of parentheses  which contains the MAC address of  the NVR where data was saved  This is followed by the  saved date time in the    yyyy mm dd sec Setting    format    e If multiple data are displayed  highlight the data in the list  that you want to read        Setting Data List       OLoad   Close           Setting Data List  Screen    3 Select the setting to load  followed by pressing   Load       The highlighted data will be read     4 The  Load Setting Data   confirmation
30.   e  Remote surveillance using PCs         Analog  cameras           VIDEO IN 1 to 4                 peaker  with built in amplifier   AUDIO OUT          AUDIO IN                              USB Mouse                 VGA monitor       VGA OUT    eo       LAN1                   IP cameras                                               Switching  HUB       Memo    e Connect LAN1 to the camera network      LAN2 to the surveillance computer network    e For details of the protocol and port number for the network  cameras on the LAN1 network  refer to the network camera   s  user manual      The protocol and port number used on the LAN2 network are  shown below    e Surveillance computer  HTTP 80  e Mail  SMTP 25  POP 110  e Time Synchronization  NTP 123  e Connect NAS to the LAN1 network   e Connect the time server to the LAN2 network        26    UPS control    Note     Switching  HUB       e You can connect up to 16 cameras   VR   N1600U E    e You can connect up to 9 cameras  out of which  a maximum of 4 analog cameras are allowed    VR N900U    e You can connect up to 10 surveillance  computers     SERIAL             120 V   240 V       e Connect only after having turned    OFF    the power of all devices      Set the IP address of the camera to 192 168 0 xxx  When setting    the IP address of the camera to an address other than  192 168 0 xxx  you must also change the IP address of LAN1   Refer to the  Instruction Manual  of each camera for procedures  to change the camera  
31.   go to   http   microsoft com windows windowsmedia mp10 privacy aspx     e Windows Media Digital Rights Management   Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology  WMDRM  to protect their intellectual property   including copyrights  This software and third party software use WMDR M to play and copy WMDRM protected content  If  the software fails to protect the content  content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software    s ability to use  MDR M to play or copy protected content  Revocation does not affect other content  When you download licenses for  protected content  you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses  Content owners may require  you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content  Microsoft software that includes WMDRM will ask for your consent prior  to the upgrade  If you decline an upgrade  you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade  You may  switch off WMDRM features that access the Internet  When these features are off  you can still play content for which you  have a valid license     c Misuse of Internet based Services     You may not use these services in any way that could harm them or impair anyone else    s use of them  You may not use  the services to try to gain unauthorized access to any service  data  account or network by any means     Getting Started       Microsoft Software License Terms for    continued     4 Windows Update Agent  also known as Software Update Services 
32.   search area       The areas that you have selected become transparent    e Selecting the  Include  checkbox adds the dragged  section to the search area  Selecting the  Exclude   checkbox deletes the dragged section from the search  area     5 Select the sensitivity level from the  Sensitivity   list in  Search Setup       The setting values are as follows    Very High    High    Medium    Low    Very Low     6 Set the time interval in the  Interval  list    7 Press the  Previous  or  Next  button to search  through data for which motion has been  detected within the area    e Smart Search begins  When motion is detected inside the  selected area  it will be highlighted in the view     Note     e Smart Search is carried out in the  Forward  and  Backward   directions from the time of the image you are viewing    e Smart Search that is performed during recording may lower the  recording frame rate  Check the performance meter while  adjusting the playback speed to ensure that the display does not  turn red           8 To continue searching  click the  Previous  and   Next  buttons    Memo    e You can use the  Save  button to temporarily save the area that  you have selected in Step 4   To return to the saved area settings  click the  Load  button after  selecting another area    e To cancel the area selection  tick  Exclude  and drag all the  areas           45    Basic Operation       Playing Back Recorded  Images via Mouse Control   continued     Playing  Skipping and Sto
33.   selected in the  Volume  field  The  defragmentation process may take several  hours depending on the status of the hard  disk    If defragmentation cannot be executed for  some reasons  a message indicating that     Defrag cannot be performed now      appears  Press  Close  to close the dialog           Initialize    Executes initialization of the hard disk with  respect of the volume selected in the   Volume  field  All data contained in the  volume will be lost after initializing  You will  be asked to confirm whether you want to  format the hard disk  If an unformatted disk is  selected  the    unformat disk    or    unpartition  disk    message will appear    Click  OK  to start initialization  To cancel   click the  Cancel  button  If initialization  cannot be executed for some reasons  a  message indicating that    Initialization cannot  be performed now     appears  Press  OK  or   Cancel  to close the dialog    Normally  the hard disk is formatted prior to  shipping  but some types of hard disk may  remain unformatted  In this case  you will see  the  unformat disk  message in the  Volume   field  For unformatted disks  select  unformat  disk  and press  Initialize      Note          Volumes C  D and L cannot be initialized                 items   Item Description    Volume Click the Down arrow to the right of the     Volume  field to select a hard disk  When  you have selected a hard disk  the capacity  and percentage of free space will appear in  the fields below
34.  31 46 93 155 470  Quality 24 0 21 42 63 126 210 635  Settings 20 0 25 51 76 152 253  16 0 32 64 96 192 319  QVGA 27 0 19 37 56 111 185  15 0 34 68 102 205 341  8 0 65 130 194 389 648  5 0 104 209 313 626                              8 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                                     Hour   Image Data lmage  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10 5 3 1  Picture VGA 32 0 15 31 46 92 151 441  Quality 24 0 21 42 62 124 204 584  Settings 20 0 25 50 75 149 245  16 0 32 63 95 187 306  QVGA 27 0 18 37 55 109 180  15 0 34 68 101 199 326  8 0 64 128 190 370 598  5 0 103 203 301 580                              8 Channel Recording No Audio Recording External HDD  1 TB x1 Unit                              Hour   Image Data Image  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 0 50 101  Quality 24 0 68 135  Settings 20 0 81 163  16 0 102 204  QVGA 27 0 60 120          15 0 109 217  8 0 205 409  5 0 328 656                                       8 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording External HDD  1 TB x 1 Unit                                                Hour   Image Data lmage  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 0 50 100  Quality 24 0 67 134  Settings 20 0 81 161  16 0 101 202  QVGA 27 0 60 119  15 0 108 215  8 0 203 403  5 0 324 639                      Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG
35.  Defining a Preset PTZ  Position  continued     Auto PTZ Patrolling  continued     E Specifying Patrol Timing      Select the patrol scheme that you want to define  from the  Patrol scheme  list    2 Specify the duration  seconds  for the PTZ  camera to stop at each preset position in the   Stay at each position in the patrol schedule in  seconds   field    3 Specify the time required for the PTZ camera to  move between two preset positions in the  Time  for each PTZ camera movement to complete in  seconds   Motion detection is disabled during  movement   field       Setup PTZ Patrolling       Patrol scheme  z  Copy Rename Remove         Setup of PTZ Patrol schedule elect ions to be used for patrolling  5 Pre Patrolling list          r       PTZ Patrol act   7 Disable patroli        Setup PTZ Patrolling  Screen    Memo              In order not to generate false motion alarms  motion detection  and recording are automatically disabled when the PTZ camera  is moving between two preset positions  After the lapse of the  specified interval  motion detection is automatically enabled  again     Note        e It is important that the camera is able to reach all the preset  positions defined in the patrolling scheme within the time interval  you have specified  Otherwise  false motion may be detected        94    E PTZ Patrolling Actions Upon Detection of Motion      Select the  Disable patrolling schedule if motion  is detected  check box       Setup PTZ Patrolling    Patrol scheme
36.  Disk     The HDD seems is no longer serviceable  Replacement is recommended     Consult your nearest JVC service center        HDD was removed    Check to ensure that the power of the external HDD is switched on   Check to ensure that the connecting cable is properly inserted     If no abnormality is found above  consult your nearest JVC service center        WARNING HDD Raid     This is a hard disk  during RAID setting  warning   Consult your nearest JVC service center        WARNING HDD xxx   Disconnect    The NAS drive is disconnected   Check the operation of NAS   Check the connection with NAS        FAN STOP       Fan abnormality  Check to ensure that the fan is running   If the fan is not moving  stop using it    Otherwise  it may break down    Consult your nearest JVC service center        151    Others       Specifications    VR N1600U E    E General  Allowable Operating Temperature    5   C to 40   C  Allowable Storage Temperature     20   C to 60   C  Allowable Operating Humidity      30   to 80    Power Supply  VR 1600U   AC 120 V  50 Hz 60 Hz  VR 1600E   AC 220   240 V  50 Hz 60 Hz  Power Consumption  VR 1600U  1 2A  VR 1600E  0 8A  Mass   Approx  7 6 kg  E Interface  Network   RJ 45x2  LAN1   1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T  LAN2   100BASE TX 10BASE T  Serial   USB2 0 A type  or equivalent  x 5  VGA Output   Up to 1600x1200  Audio Input   Analog audio RCA x 2   8 dBs 50 kQ   Unbalanced   Audio Output   Analog audio RCAx 1   8 dBs 600 kQ   Unbalanced   I O Termina
37.  Mode   e EXT REC IN Signal Recording Mode  e Emergency Recording Mode             E Recording Control Mode  t  Page 53     This mode performs recording according to the  Camera Record  Setting    The  REC CONTROL  indicator lights up   You can switch the recording control mode on or off by pressing and  holding the  REC CONTROL  button     Set each camera to on off using the  Scheduler     settings   c  Page 53    e Specify the frame rate and conditions for starting recording in   Camera Settings  t Page 55         Note    e During the interval that is set as offline in  Scheduler       recording will not be performed regardless of the  Camera  Settings     e The  REC CONTROL  button is    disabled    when the main menu  is displayed  when settings are being specified  and during  recording    e When there is an unconnected camera  it may take a while  before the  REC CONTROL  indicator lights up        Memo      Press the  REC STOP  button to cancel the    recording control  mode    and enable manual recording mode    e Press and hold down the  REC STOP  button to cancel all     recording modes    and stop recording    e Setting  Operate  to ON switches the mode automatically to the     recording control mode      When the    ON at startup    checkbox  of  Record Control  under  Unit Setting  of the main menu is  selected         E Manual Recording Mode    The manual recording mode executes recording from all cameras  regardless of the  Camera Record Setting   Recording is 
38.  OK  button    e Windows users need to define a Windows user for each host name specified in   Host Name  in  OS Setting       gt  Page 72   As the user   s host name is not displayed on the  User Administration   screen  it is recommended that you delete the Windows user and add  again if you have changed the host name   s Page 118           Delete    Deletes a preset user    Select the user to delete from the  Current isers groups  list  and click the  Delete   button  The user that has been deleted from the list is no longer able to login to NVR  Viewer        Change  password          Enables you to edit a preset user name and password   Select the user to edit from the  Current isers groups  list  and click the  Change  password     button        Define Username  and Password               Full access for all  users    Restrict user access        Full access for all users    Select this option to grant all users access to all NVR Viewer features and cameras    Restrict user access      Select this option to restrict users    access  Then click the  User Access     button to  define access right for each user     Memo        e For details on access rights  refer to  Defining User Rights   rs Page 118                8          Item Preset Values Description          Log Files Log information may be required for diagnosing troubles        Days to log   10 For specifying the number of days for storing the event log in the  Image Server Setting           Audit Log Enables you
39.  P MAC CH MAKER MODEL  19216802 004080815764 1 AXIS  212PTZ  192168020 008088421403 1 NO    19216805  00408c7  8c0c 1 AXIS  20W    ODelete IP Infomation     a Oup   IP Lease Parameter a   Start Address    192 168 0 100  ODown   Unit  Units v   SubnetMask  255 255 255 0    er 192 168 0 254    Primary  192 168 0 253    192 168 0 252  OEntry       MAC       Only Camera Any Client OAdd ODel     ok  Cancel    3 Replace the detected camera accordingly in  sequence    Use the  SKIP  button to select the Sort button  followed by pressing  the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button to sort the order of the  detected cameras in sequence    ik      The Sort button allows you to perform  IP  sort   MAC   sort   CH  sort   MAKER  sort  or  MODEL  sort    e After using the  SKIP  button to select the list  followed by  using  2    or  10 0    8    to select a camera  use the   SKIP  button to select  Up  or  Down   and press the  16   ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button to change the  sequence of the cameras    ik     Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not  using    Note      Do not remove the check for Analog In   VR N900U   Memo       Priority is given to cameras at the top of the list during use  and  camera numbers will be registered in sequence from the top              4 Use the  SKIP  button to select  Entry   followed  by pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER   button   k    e The camera that is automatically detected is registered in  the system     5 Select the analog input cha
40.  SKIP   and  STOP PB   buttons    E Control using the  PLAY    SKIP   and   STOP PB   buttons on the front panel     Playing Back     Press the  PLAY  button    e Playback starts from the date time indicated on the   Master Time  of  Time Navigation        Images are played back according to the angle of the  shuttle dial  x1 20  x1 5  x1  x2  x5  x10  x20          Master Time  area                           Tuesday  July 24  2007 1 00   11 21 33 343 AM   si  E  aa  Id    lt  ie  Lal   gt  gt   sa 2     i  gt    z e   Back Time Forth  TO  44 p     Playback FIRE  Slow 7 Fast       9  m   gt   Browse  Screen  Skip gaps during playback  7rar007   11 21 33 AM    Goto  Go To  Button              Time Navigation  Section    Skipping    Press the  SKIP  button      The  SKIP  buttons have the following functions        S Moves to the first image in the previous sequence   Moves to the first image in the database of the selected  camera when the button is pressed and held down        T Moves to the first image in the next sequence  Press and  hold down the button to move to the latest image in the  database of the selected camera                 Memo              Sequence    indicates a certain block of images that are recorded  during motion detection       Recorded images are stored in the database   Note      Adjusting the Playback Speed  Jog   Shuttle Playback     You can adjust the playback speed by turning the jog dial shuttle  dial on the front panel     E Shuttle Playback    
41.  Start               Select check  box    Do not select  check box    Select this check box to display live images automatically when the  system starts up           re Page 31          69    Applications       Main Menu List  continued     Unit Setting  continued                                                                                Time of Record             NONE  30seconds    60seconds  5minutes  10minutes  20minutes  Continue       Select the duration of emergency recording  which starts recording  of all channels when a signal is input to the  EMERGENCY   terminal on the rear panel    Select    Continue    to continue recording until it is stopped manually  on the front panel        Item Preset Values Description Higlelenee  Page     Error Report Enables you to select how you want to be notified when an error is    detected in the system   Dialog   Select check box   Select  Dialog  to display a warning dialog on the screen  te Page 151  Do not select  check box  Mail   Select check box   Select  Mail  to receive an e mail notification on any abnormality at      Do not select the preset e mail address   check box Memo    e For details on errors  refer to the actions to take when the   WARNING  indicator lights up      Page 151       Record Control    ON at startup   Select check box   Select this check box to turn on the recording control mode when  Do not select the system starts up   check box     Mail Server     Enables you to configure the necessary informati
42.  The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must  be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked  with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured  GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW    The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to  the terminal which is marked with the letter N or which is  coloured BLACK  The wire which is coloured BROWN  must be connected to the terminal which is marked with  the letter L or coloured RED        POWER SYSTEM  Connection to the mains supply    Please use this unit in an appropriate power source           WARNING     TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  SHOCK  DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN  OR MOISTURE           CAUTION    To prevent electric shock  do not open the cabinet  No  user serviceable parts inside  Refer servicing to qualified  service personnel              Note   The rating plate and the safety caution are on the rear  and top of the unit                       Caution for AC Power Cord    FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY   Appropriate AC Power Cord must be used in each local area        FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE  ETC   Not to be used in the U K     FOR U K  ONLY  If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket outlet   it should be cut off and appropriate one fitted                                            PRECAUTIONS WHEN MOUNTING RACK   CAUTION   e Do not install the VR N1600U E VR N900U to the rack in places where ambient temperature becomes 40  C or more   e When rack m
43.  WARNING   This is a Class A product  In a domestic environment this  product may cause radio interference in which case the  user may be required to take adequate measures           broadcast  or cable programme and in any literary   dramatic  musical or artistic work embodied therein        WARNING          For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT  the socket outlet shall          CAUTION totals   be installed near the equipment and shall be easily  RED colour indications on the operation panel are accessibl    provided but they are not safety related  RED colour    indications    CAUTION     1  For Recording Indicator   2  For Alarm Indicator   3  For Warning Indicator     1  Please do not detach the front cover    2  Please put it when the front cover comes off              Information for Users on Disposal of Old Equi          ment       Attention   This symbol is  only valid in the  European  Union      European Union     This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equipment should not be disposed as general  household waste at its end of life  Instead  the product should be handed over to the applicable collection  point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment for proper treatment  recovery and recycling in  accordance with your national legislation    By disposing of this product correctly  you will help to conserve natural resources and will help prevent  potential negative effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by  i
44.  Wasser in Ber  hrung gekommen ist    d  Wenn das Ger  t nicht normal funktioniert  obwohl die Betriebsanleitung befolgt wurde  Passen Sie nur die  Steuerungen an  die in der Betriebsanleitung vermerkt sind  Die Anpassung anderer Steuerungen kann  ansonsten zu Sch  den f  hren  die dann sehr aufw  ndig von einem qualifizierten Techniker repariert werden  m  ssen  damit das Ger  t wieder einwandfrei funktioniert    e  Falls das Ger  t fallen gelassen oder das Geh  use besch  digt wurde    f  Falls sich die Leistung des Ger  tes sp  rbar   ndern sollte   in diesem Fall muss das Ger  t dringend   berpr  ft  und oder repariert werden     Vi    SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN  for Germany   ACHTUNG     1  Nehmen Sie nicht die Frontabdeckung ab    2  Falls sich die Frontabdeckung l  sen sollte  setzen Sie sie sofort wieder auf        Lager  und Verwendungsort    E Vermeiden Sie  den Rekorder an folgenden Pl  tzen zu lagern oder zu verwenden    Eine Missachtung kann zu einem Fehler oder einer St  rung f  hren       Extrem hei  e oder kalte Pl  tze  die au  erhalb der zul  ssigen Betriebstemperatur liegen  5  C     40  C    e Feuchte oder trockene Pl  tze  die au  erhalb der zul  ssigen Feuchtigkeit f  r den Betrieb liegen  30      80       Pl  tze  an denen starke Magnetfelder erzeugt werden  beispielsweise Tranformatoren oder Motoren      Pl  tze in der N  he von Ger  ten  die elektrische Wellen erzeugen  beispielsweise Sender Empf  nger oder Handys  e Staubige oder sandige Pl  tze   e Pl 
45.  by  default  Do not change this setting as it may adversely affect the  recording time and recording performance    e When archiving is used  you can store images without being  constrained by this limit      The following screen may appear for some settings  When it  appears  click  No               Note   e  f you are not using a UPS  it is recommended that you select     Max timespan in database    and set the time to    60minutes                 Item Description   D Max records   Saves recorded images to the database  in database   until the maximum number of records is  reached  Specify the maximum number of  records in the neighboring field   If the  Archive automatically when database  is full   check box is not selected  old  records are automatically overwritten upon  exceeding the maximum number of records     Max Saves recorded images to the database up  timespan in   to the specified recording time  Specify the  database total recording time from the list in the  neighboring field in minutes  hours and  days   If the  Archive automatically when database  is full   check box is not selected  old  records are automatically overwritten upon  exceeding the recording time      Archive Starts archiving data automatically when  automatically   the database is full   when Deletes old archive data when the available  database is   Space of the hard disk is running low     full                110       Flash Memory Utility    You can save set values to flash memory devices
46.  continuously before the images are moved   the selected sequences will be moved collectively        46       Time  Slider    Dragging the slider to the left changes the recording date to an  older date  and dragging the slider to the right changes it to a more  recent date  Use the top slider bar for fine browsing  x0 4 to x240   within a limited period of time  and use the bottom bar for easy  browsing  x20 to x36 000  for longer time spans        Playback  Slider    The center position is for playback at normal speed  x1   Drag the  slider to the left and right to reduce and increase the playback  speed respectively  Dragging the slider to the leftmost position  pauses playback    The playback speed is displayed at the top right of the  Master  Time  area     e Play Button    a     Plays back images in the reverse direction      F      fm    Plays back images     W    Stops playback   Fi    Note       The Play buttons do not work when the  Playback  slider is at its  leftmost position  paused   Select the desired speed by moving  the  Playback  Slider      The angle of the shuttle dial does not affect playback  which is  operated in the  Time Navigation  section using a mouse     Memo      When    Skip gaps during playback    of  Time Navigation  is  checked  playback is performed by skipping portions for which  no recorded image is found in the selected camera    e When the recorded images are played back with some images  skipped  the  SKIP  display will appear in red in
47.  default       The IP address of the analog camera network for VR N900U is set to    192 168 201 253    by default  Do not change the IP address  Doing so  may cause the system to malfunction        74         Other Settings       Item    Preset Values       Description          Day and Time Propert    ies    To synchronize the time with the Internet time server or to specify the date and  time manually  click  Update Now         Automatically  synchronize with an  Internet server    Select check box      Do not select  check box    Select this check box to synchronize the time with the Internet time server     Note       You cannot specify the date and time manually when this box is selected  The  settings in the boxes cannot be changed      The date and time properties are not enabled until you have clicked the   Update Now  button      Changing the time setting may prevent normal playback of recordings made at  the same time as a result      Changing the    Time    field of the time setting when operations are in progress  may prevent normal display of live images  In this case  reboot this unit              Server    Enter the address of the Internet time server     Note    e Connect the time server to the LAN2 network              NTP Polling Interval    For specifying the time interval  in minutes  for synchronizing with the Internet  time server        Date       Time    Enter this field when you are specifying the date manually     Memo      The  Day and Time Properti
48.  destination of transmitted audio file  number  of deliveries  to another event     1 Select the event to copy settings to  existing  settings are overwritten  from the  Audio playing  for  list on the  Event Audio Setting  screen    2 Click  Setting copy      The  Setting copy  screen appears              Password    Enter the password to establish connection with the camera that  supports bidirectional audio  Audio transmission to the camera that  supports bidirectional audio will not be executed if the password  entered is incorrect     Memo   e To enter the password  you need to ensure that communication  of the selected camera on the network is enabled           1 Select a camera from the  Audio playing for  list  on the  Event Audio Setting  screen       Memo    e To select a camera  click on the camera name to highlight the  display  Note that selecting the check box does not select the  camera        2 Click  Password setting     The  Password setting  screen appears        Password setting                               ee     Item Description  D Camera The name of the camera for entering the    name password appears  You cannot alter the   Camera name         IPaddress   The IP address of the camera for entering the  password appears  You cannot alter the   IPaddress       N           Setting copy  Source event name   o  Destination event name   TGP EVENT    2    Cancel    3   Item Description    Source Select from the list the event to copy settings  event  from   n
49.  every time an image is received from the camera        Operating status of the camera  Characters to the left  of the indicator        Display Status       Live  Green  When live images are displayed without    being recorded       REC  Red  When recording is in progress       Stop  Yellow  When images are not acquired from the  camera  or when the camera is in the    offline mode  t amp  Page 53                   The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the  name of the device to which the camera is connected   e To enlarge the camera image  double click the blue bar at the    top  To return to the original size  double click the blue bar again       You can turn off the light of the indicator by clicking the event or  motion indicator that is lit        Viewing Images Using the PTZ Features  PTZ stands for pan  tilt and zoom    The PTZ features are only available if the camera supports the PTZ  functions  If the camera is not a PTZ camera  pressing the button  will have no effect       Click the PTZ navigation button in the  PTZ  Control  section      The camera moves in the direction indicated by the arrow    e Click the round button at the center to return to the home  position    e Click the     and     buttons to zoom in and out  respectively            PTZ Navigation Button    Ki       Presets     IPIX PTZ Positions         Digital Zoom           Live  Screen  Note     The PTZ features are only available if the camera supports the    PTZ functions  If 
50.  format           24 to 168 169 to 720                      1 day to 1 1 week to 1 1 month to 3 3 months or  week month months longer  Note          Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10    according to the condition of the hard disk and the images  recorded      Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk        143    Others       Recording Time Schedule     VN N900     The actual recording time varies according to the camera settings  input image content  and condition of the hard disk   Use the tables below as a guide to the recording time       9 channel recording without audio recording or additional HDD upgrade                                                               9 channel recording with 2 channel audio recording and without additional HDD upgrade     Hour    Image Data Image Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 15 10 5 3 1   32 40 79 132   24 54 108 180   von 16 82 165 275   10 134 267 446   27 48 95 159   15 88 176 294   QVGA 8 168 336 560   5 270 541                                                                                                                                                                                   Hour   Image Data lmage Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 15 10 5 3 1  32 39 78 130  24 54 106 175  VGA 16 81 161 265  10 131 258 420  27 47 94 155  15 87 172 282  QVGA 8 164 321 520  5 261 504    9 channel recording without audio recording and with one additional 1 
51.  images in database  occurs  Press the   ALARM CLEAR  button to turn off the light of the  ALARM  indicator           seconds pre post recordings on motion event     You can record images preceding and following a detected motion or event  Specify the time  interval to record in the number of seconds before and after the occurrence   t  Page 135        Memo    e Do not set to    0 seconds       e If Offline is selected in  Scheduler      images will not be recorded      This setting has no impact on manual recording  emergency recording  and  EXT REC IN   recording              Datebase      Settings    Enables you to specify the database settings    gt  Page 110             Motion      Detection  Settings       Motion Detection         Motion Color               Enables you to specify the two parameters for motion detection  namely  Sensitivity  and   Motion Sensitivity        Page 104           Enables you to specify the color to be used for highlighting detected motion        IF       Basic Operation       Recording Camera Images   continued     Settings  continued                                                        Item Preset Values Description  Exclude     Enables you to specify the regions to exclude from motion detection   c  Page 104   Regions  Settings  Exclude Regions     Region Color    Not used   9  PTZ Preset   Enables you to specify preset positions and patrolling   Positions    When a configurable camera is selected  this button is displayed to the right of
52.  inserted    e Do not disconnect the CD DVD drive while the Burn CD DVD  screen is displayed    e If media is not detected  restart the Burn CD DVD screen        50    Writing Data to a USB Memory Device   Operation on the Unit     Insert the USB memory device that you wish to export data to into  VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U  and perform the same  procedures for  Burning a CD DVD  from Steps 1 to 9       Page 47       Specify the export destination  e To export to a USB memory device  select  USB         IE NVR Viewer AVI   JPEG Export    Export Statu          Start Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 01 23 AM          End Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 02 24 AM  Source   JVC   Camera 3   Export Type   Export Format    Add Timestamp    Framerate    Digital Zoom Export     AMI Codec  Microsoft Video 1    Export Destination    Oc     USB  Check    Button       AMI Filename  20070705 0801 23  avi    2       Export            2 Click  Export   e Export begins     Operation from a Surveillance Computer    Follow the same procedures for  Burning a CD DVD  from Steps 1  to 9   ce Page 47       Specify the export destination          iE NVR Viewer AVI   JPEG Export    Export Status    Start Time  2007 E7A17E 9 41 01       End Time  20072F7 A178 9 41 03  Source   JVC YN C20  Camera 1  Export Type   Export Format    Add Timestamp    Framerate    Digital Zoom Export     AVI Codec  Microsoft Video 1       Export Destination        Desktop  D Path             AVI Filename  2007071 7 094101 
53.  is executed when there are no recorded  images  the    Connection  NVR Camera1 on  127 0 0 1 80    message will continue to appear on the  Playback screen      To exit the NVR Viewer  click the Close button     Memo     Each image bar comes with an online indicator at the top of the   Browse  screen  The indicator lights up in green each time a   new image is displayed       Recorded images are saved in the database     Database    refers  to data recorded in this unit    e When    Before Database Start    appears on the  Browse  screen   no database  recorded image  is found in the position prior to the  currently viewed image    e When    After Database End    appears on the  Browse  screen   no database  recorded image  is found in the position after the  currently viewed image     Note    e If several sections are opened on the left side of the  Browse   screen  it may not be possible to display them all in the screen   In this case  double click the section bars to close the sections    e Do not switch the view frequently between  Live  and  Browse   within a short time interval                 Select a view    For details on the view settings  refer to  Screen Setup    t  Page 60        Select a view from the  Views  section  or from  the view list at the upper end of the window    Note        e Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval    e When live images do not appear on VN C625U VN C655U  set  the password for connecting VN C625U VN C655U on t
54.  is switched on        Camera is not automatically detected  Follow instructions in the camera   s  Instruction Manual  to check the IP address  settings    When the IP Lease feature is in use  turn OFF the camera and ON again with this unit  started up        Unable to control using  REC  and  PLAY   Check to ensure that the operation lock is not turned on        Images are not recorded in the recording control Check the  Camera Recording Settings    mode  Check to ensure that the scheduler is set to online   Check to ensure that the camera is in the recording control mode        Unable to play back audio sound  Check to ensure that the audio item of the camera device is set to    Enabled    in the   Camera Record Setting  menu   Check to ensure that audio is selected in  Audio         Operation of the unit is disabled  Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button on the front panel  and press the  OPERATE   button for 7 seconds or longer to shut down the power forcibly        Memo     When the power is forcibly shut down  recorded images that are not archived   c  Page 108  may not be properly played back        The message below appears after turning on the The built in backup battery level is running low   power  Consult your nearest JVC service center      COMS Settings Wrong CMOS Date  Time Not Press  F1 to Run SETUP Press F2 to load default values  and continue             150       E Actions when Warning Indicator Lights Up    Error Message    Action to Take       WARNING HDD
55.  malfunction or break down  and lead to fire       Do not block the ventilation holes    Doing so may cause heat to trap inside the unit and result  in fire  Do not use this unit by laying it down sideways   upside down  or at an angle      Do not place objects on this unit    Placing heavy objects  such as TV monitors  or objects  that are bigger in size on this unit may cause it to lose  balance and drop or fall  hence resulting in injuries      Do not stand or sit on this unit    Doing so may cause this unit to fall or break down  and  result in injuries  Keep it out of the reach of young  children      Do not place objects with water  e g   vases  flower pots   cups  cosmetic products  and chemicals  on this unit   Water may enter this unit through the ventilation holes and  result in fire or electric shock      Do not insert objects into this unit    Metallic or other flammable objects that enter this unit  from the ventilation holes may result in fire or electric  shock     10    Precautions for Handling Hard Disk Drive      The distance between the head and the disk is only about  0 02 u m when the hard disk  henceforth HDD  is reading  the data  Vibration or impact that is exerted on the HDD  may therefore cause the head to hit against the disk   hence causing the disk surface to dent or the disk to chip   When this occurs  data may not be properly read  or ina  worse scenario  continued use in this condition may result  in head crash  damage   Careful attention must 
56.  may differ according to the camera in  use    e Specify the user name with a different name from the  OS  Setting     Page 72  host name under the user setting for NAS  connection    Note    e After configuring the NAS drive  an error message will appear on  the NVR Viewer for several minutes  and live images may not be  displayed during this interval              141    Others       Recording Time Schedule   VR N1600U E     The actual recording time varies according to the camera settings  input image content  and condition of the hard disk   Use the tables below as a guide to the recording time       16 Channel Recording No Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                                                                   Hour   Image Data lmage  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10 5 3 1 0 5  Picture VGA 32 0   14 22 43 72 223 470  Quality 24 0   20 30 60 100 305  Settings 20 0   24 37 73 122 371  16 0     31 46 93 155 470  QVGA 27 0     18 26 53 88 269  15 0     33 50 99 166 503  8 0     64 96 191 319  5 0     103 155 310 517                  16 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                                                       Hour   Image Data Image  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10 5 3 1 0 5   Picture VGA 32 0     14 22 43 72 216  Quality 24 0     20 30 59 98 292  Settings 20 0   24 36 72 120 353  16 0     31 46 92 151 441  QVGA 27 0     17 26 52 86 258  1
57.  message  appears  Press  OK         Load Setting Data      Cancel         The preset data will be read   e When reading is complete  a message informing you that  data has been read appears  Click the  OK  button     5 Press  Close  to return to the  Flash Memory  Utility  screen    112    E Removing the Flash Memory Device    Select  Remove Flash Memory     e The  Remove Flash Memory   confirmation dialog  appears  Press  OK         Remove Flash Memory      Cancel       e The  Flash Memory was removed  message appears   Press  OK         Flash Memory was removed       2 Remove the flash memory device from the   SERIAL  on the front  rear  panel    Memo       Items specified in the  Image Quality     settings of  Main  Menu     Camera Record Setting      Page 58    OS Setting    t Page 72   and  Password  section of  Unit Setting     c  Page 69  will not be saved    e To read the preset data after you have selected  Remove  Flash Memory   remove the flash memory device from the  serial terminal and insert it again  When the flash memory is  inserted  it will be automatically detected     Note      If you are reading preset data saved using a different language  setting  change  Language Setting  of the  Main Menu  to the   language used when the data is saved       If a Master Slave setup is created using Milestone System s  Enterprise 6 0 on an NVR  settings on that unit cannot be loaded  on another NVR    e Data saved using VR N900U cannot be used on VR N1600U E   and vice
58.  not use the supplied cords on devices other than this  unit       Do not place heavy objects on the power cord  or place it  under this unit    Doing so may cause damage on the cords  and result in  fire or electric shock       Do not use cords other than those supplied with this unit    Use only power cords supplied together with this unit   Using cords with different withstanding voltage  specifications or damaged cords may result in fire or  electric shock       Do not remove the power plug during recording or  playback  or when the HDD is being accessed     Maintenance      Turn off the power before performing maintenance of this  unit       Wipe this unit using a soft cloth  Wiping using thinner or  benzene may cause the surface to melt or fog  When the  surface is extremely dirty  wipe using a cloth that is dipped  into a neutral detergent diluted with water  followed by  wiping with a dry cloth     Energy Conservation      Turn off the power of the system for safety reasons and to  save energy if this unit is not to be used for a long time     Copyright     Use of video or audio sound recorded using this unit for  commercial purposes or playing them for public viewing or  listening may be an infringement of the copyrights of their  respective authors under the copyright law       These video  audio  recordings shall only be restricted to  personal uses  and their use without prior consent of the  copyright holder is strictly prohibited under the copyright  law     Oth
59.  of these protocols to access other software     e Remote Boot Feature   If the JVC enabled the device Remote Boot feature of the software  you may   i  your server and to deploy the software on licensed devices as part of the Remote Boot process  and   ii  use the Remote Boot Installation Service only for deployment of the software to devices as part of the Remote Boot  process  and   iii download the software to licensed devices and use it on them     For more information  please refer to the device documentation or contact JVC     e Internet Based Services   Microsoft provides Internet based services with the software  Microsoft may change or cancel them at any time     a Consent for Internet Based Services   The software features described below connect to Microsoft or service provider computer systems over the Internet  In  some cases  you will not receive a separate notice when they connect  You may switch off these features or not use them   For more information about these features  visit    http   www microsoft com windowsxp downloads updates sp2 docs privacy mspx     By using these features  you consent to the transmission of this information   Microsoft does not use the information to identify or contact you     b Computer Information   The following features use Internet protocols  which send to the appropriate systems computer information  such as your  Internet protocol address  the type of operating system  browser and name and version of the software you are u
60.  only for one unit  Select    Disable    if a DHCP server is  operating on the same network  When the  IP Lease  is enabled for  two or more devices at the same time  the IP address may change  to a static address  and cause malfunction of the cameras              IP Lease Parameter          Start Address   192 168 0 100 For specifying the first IP address to be assigned to the cameras   Unit   20Units For selecting the number of IP addresses to be assigned to the  1Unit to 99Units   Cameras  The selected number of IP addresses will be assigned    starting from the first IP address        Subnet Mask      255 255 255 0    For specifying the subnet mask for the cameras                    Gateway   192 168 0 254 For specifying the gateway for the cameras    DNS Server  Primary   192 168 0 253 For specifying the primary DNS for the cameras   Secondry   192 168 0 252 For specifying the secondary DNS for the cameras        Domain Name       For specifying the domain name for the cameras           Lease Time Limit      No  Yes    For specifying the valid period of the IP address assigned to the  cameras    If    Yes    is selected  you can set the lease time in units of hours    Setting value  1 hour to 99 hours             Client         Only Camera  Any Client       For selecting whether to apply restrictions on the device when  assigning the IP address  If    Only Camera    is selected  IP address  will only be assigned to the corresponding camera  If    Any Client    is  select
61.  or retrieve data  from them     I Select  Flash Memory Utility  from the main  menu      The  Flash Memory Utility  screen appears     OSave Setting Data  OLoad Setting Data    ORemove Flash Memory     Flash Memory Utility  Screen    E Save Setting Date    The following are procedures to save the preset data in the flash  memory device       Insert the flash memory device into the   SERIAL  terminal on the front  rear  panel    2 Select  Save Setting Date     e A  Save Setting Data   confirmation message appears     The  Flash memory cannot be detected  message may  appear in some cases  In this case  wait for about 30   seconds and select  Save Setting Date  again     3 Press the  OK  button      The preset data is saved   e When saving is complete  a message informing you that  data has been saved appears  Click the  OK  button again     4 Select  Remove Flash Memory     e The  Remove Flash Memory   confirmation message  appears  Press  OK       The  Flash Memory was removed  message appears   Press  OK      5 Remove the flash memory device from the   SERIAL  on the front  rear  panel    Memo      Items specified in the  Image Quality     settings of  Main  Menu     Camera Record Setting       Page 58    OS  Setting     Page 72   and  Password  section of  Unit  Setting       Page 69  will not be saved    e Settings data is saved to the VR N1600U E folder in the flash  memory  USB memory    VR N1600U E      Settings data is saved to the VR N900U folder in the flash  memory
62.  perform tests and adjustments  of the settings under different conditions  time of the day   weather such as windiness  etc               Select a camera from  Device Manager  on the   Camera Recording Administator  screen  and  click the  Motion Detection    button in   Settings     to open  Adjust Motion Detection     2 Specify  Noise Sensitivity  and  Motion  Sensitivity       The  Noise Sensitivity  slider is used to determine the level  of change in the image pixel that is to be recognized as  motion  The    High    setting recognizes minute changes in  the pixel as motion  Areas in the image that have changed  when compared with the previous image are highlighted   default color is green         Adjust Motion Detection    Noise Sensitivity                _____      High  Motion Sensitivity      I        640    OK        Adjust Motion Detection  Screen    Memo      The  Motion Sensitivity  slider is used to determine the number  of pixels for which a change is to be recognized as motion  When  the slider is moved from side to side  the black vertical line at the  bottom of the screen moves together  and the boundary  Motion  Sensitivity  is adjusted  When detected motion exceeds the  selected sensitivity level  the bar changes from green to red   indicating a positive detection           105    Applications       General Settings    Use  Camera Record Setting     General Settings  to specify general  settings related to the system  such as e mails        Milestone XProt
63.  press the  14   ZOOM OUT  ZOOM OUT CANCEL  button at the same time    ik    Pressing the button each time increases the resolution  value      Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press the  15   ZOOM IN  ZOOM IN ENTER  button at the same time    ik    Pressing the button each time decreases the resolution  value        Preset   1024 x 768  Default value   Values 1280 x 768   1280 x 1024   1600 x 1200             VR N1600U E                                                           14 ZOOM OUT   Button     FUNCTION  Button     15 ZOOM IN  Button    VR N900U                   E e         o o 0  ONO  amp                                        ZOOM OUT  IF    NCTION  Button  CANCEL  Button     ZOOM IN ENTER  Button       Memo   e Selecting a resolution not supported by the monitor may prevent  normal monitor synchronization        Precautions when  Changing Settings    Note that any incorrect changes made to the settings of this unit  may cause it to malfunction    e Before making any changes  save the current settings to  Flash  Memory Utility       Page 111  to allow you to restore the  previous settings should anything go wrong      It is recommended that you save the setting data before making  any changes      The section at the bottom left of NVR Viewer might not be  operative depending on the monitor resolution  In such a case   double click the bar of the currently opened upper section to  close it to enable the operation of the lower section     29    Basic Operat
64.  reboot your computer depending on the settings     Network Properties    Network adapter interface name     InteR  82566DM Gigabit Network Connection    Physical Address  00 19 DB 44 BA F6             Obtain an IP address automatically       IP address  192      D Subnet Mask     Default Gateway  0    255      Preferred DNS Server     Alternate DNS Server     Host Name  vr n1600    DNS Domain Name        Date and Time Properties             Automatically synchronize with an Internet server       Server   NTP Polling Interval  Minute    Date  7i 9 2007 s D    Time  3 21 51 AM             Time Zone  Auto Summertime Adjustment        GMT  Greenwich Mean Time   Dublin  Edinburgh  Lis          Update Now    Volume Properties    Device Volume        LOAD configuration                 4     SAVE changes     O       Ka       E Network Adapter    This section enables you to specify settings such as the IP address of this unit  The camera network and Intranet of this unit  are configured with a different IP address  The default address for the camera network is  192 168 0 253   and that for the  Intranet is  192 168 1 253     There is acommon host name for all adapters       When specifying LAN1  camera network  settings       Item    Preset Values    Description        D Network adapter  interface name    VR N1600U E   Intel   82566DM Gigabit  Network   VR N900U   Realtek RTL8169 8110  Family Gigabit Ethernet  NIC    Settings when you are using LAN1  camera network         Obtain an 
65.  recorded images is displayed for each  Alart   such as when  motion is detected  t  Page 104      1 Double click the  Alerts  bar on the  Browse   screen   2 Click        on the  Alerts  list and select an event  from the list  e You can select a specific event  camera or  Server          Alerts  List          Alerts   Select Alert     Alert              PLAY  Screen  Event List  3 Click the  Get List  button    e A list of detected events appears   e You can click on the event list to view recorded images of  the selected event     Memo          The Alerts list displays events occurring around the time   approx  1 day before and after  set in  Time Navigation         Smart Search    Smart Search enables you to search the parts with motion by   specifying the search area within the recorded images of the   selected camera    1 Double click the  Smart Search  bar on the   Browse  screen            Search Setup  Sensitivity     Mediurn    Interval       All Images    Search Area                     Show Grid     Browse  Screen  rch               Search    Previous ial Next   7  8  3             2 Tick  Show Grid  in  Search Area  setting    3 Select the camera to display  e A blue grid overlay appears        LM I      Ae Git  T    2  y  V   BEET ZF Arme  ik hmn    a  TENKANEN     SI LKR Nee  BPEL A  I JSR  Sea  BSED  FP A mer Col 11  je    zeige 1   mie  Ta I 1  Te   T7 ee Tf  SS   else   Ze WF le I i 171 V  1 an   van          4 Click and drag within the screen to specify the
66.  recorded when the  recording server is temporarily stopped  Display of live images  on the surveillance computer is also turned off        90       3 Click the  PTZ Preset Positions     button    e The  PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  window  appears        PTZ Preset Positions for  AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3                            Preset Positions    I    Use preset positions from device  Set Position  Edit Name   Test    Delete       Setup     Cancel   PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  Window       Note        The following configuration options are available in the   PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  window                 positions from  device    Item Description    PTZ View For moving the PTZ camera to the desired  position  You can check the position on the  screen      Preset For registering  deleting and testing a PTZ  Positions camera position   Use preset This is only applicable to cameras that    support this feature   Select this check box to use preset         When using VN C625U VN C655U  the preset position cannot  be registered if electronic zoom feature of camera is functioning   Please take note that no error message will be displayed in such  case  During PTZ preset setting  turn off electronic zoom in the  following operations to prevent registration by mistake    e From  PTZ page  of VN C625U VN C655U  set  EZoom  Limit  to    1     For details  refer to  INSTRUCRTIONS  of  VN C625U VN C655U        positions defined by the camera or networ
67.  s IP address           Note        e Do not connect LAN1 to the internet  If the internet is busy or the  relay equipment fails  you may not be able to save important  camera images  To maintain full recording capacity  it is  recommended that a dedicated network be used  Be sure to  connect the LAN1 camera network to the same segment   Do  not use the address translation of NAT and NAPT etc  or a  router        f you connect LANZ to the internet from a surveillance  computer  you will need to configure IP Masquerading    e Communication between LAN1 and LANZ is not possible  Nor is  it possible to configure a camera connected to LAN1 from the  surveillance computer connected to LANZ  In order to configure  a camera connected to LAN1  it is necessary to connect the  computer for configuring cameras to LAN1    e LAN1 and LAN2 are incompatible with QoS  Sound may not be  played normally depending on the condition of the circuit      The default LAN1 IP address is 192 168 0 253 and the default  LAN2 IP address is 192 168 1 253  To change the address  use   OS Setting       Page 72       In VR N900U  analog input circuitry is considered as a network  encoder  IP video server  and the IP address is set to  192 168 201 12 by default  When altering the IP address of  LAN1 and LAN2  specify an address  different segment  other  than 192 168 201 0 to 192 168 201 255  Also make sure that the  same segment is not specified for LAN1 and LAN2   VR N900U    e When a single network camera 
68.  scheme  must be defined in advance               c  Page 94           7 The Schedule Settings window appears  e Click  On Event  or  Always               Online method         Always u       Cancel                                    On Event Switches to the online mode only when an  event occurs  Specify the event in the event  start stop item         Always Online mode at all time       Cancel Cancels the settings    Memo        e To clear the period  select  Cancel  from  Mode  at the top left   select the check box of the item you want to delete   Online    E   mail  or  Patrolling    and move the mouse pointer while left   clicking the mouse on the period in the calendar section              E Camera Alert Scheduler Screen           Camera Alert Scheduler             Set E  Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday                Saturday       Start event  Stop event                      nd select functions  Hold left mouse button and drag ta medify the schedule   Click in the weekdays row to toggle between all week single day zoom views                                               D Copy Enables you to copy the schedule displayed  Schedule in the calendar section    2  Paste Pastes the schedule copied using  Copy  Schedule Schedule  to the selected camera    3  Copy and Pastes the schedule displayed in the  Paste to All   calendar section to all cameras    4 Close Exits the  Scheduler     screen      Display Bar    The display bar indicates the active period for each o
69.  the   Outputs     button   10 Outputs        Enables you to specify output settings   ss Page 102   1D Event   Enables you to select events for triggering event notification   ss Page 102   Notifications     1  Image Quality      Enables you to specify the image resolution and picture quality   c  Page 58   Note           When the recording program  recording server  is operating  the  PTZ Preset Positions     button is disabled  To stop the recording server  temporarily  press the  Service Manager     button on the  Camera Record Setting  screen  followed by clicking the  Pause  button    c  Page 84    e Video images and audio sound are not recorded when the recording server is temporarily stopped  Display of live images on the surveillance  computer is also turned off    e Even when    Always    is selected under  When to store images in database    in the recording control mode  recording is not executed during  the interval when the  Scheduler     is set to     offline      c  Page 53    e Clicking  Cancel  does not cancel the picture quality and settings that are specified on another screen           Setting Picture Quality    Clicking the  Preview Image  button while you are adjusting the  camera settings enables you to view the effect of your settings       Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu    2 Select a camera from  Device Manager  and click   Camera Settings        The  Camera Settings  screen appears   3 Click  Image Quality        The  Configure D
70.  the  Audio Source  list of the  Audio  section    To temporarily mute the live audio sound  select the  Mute  check  box        Audio Sources       No Audio                           Select check box     Live  Screen       Note    e When the audio source is selected by multiple surveillance  computers  the sound quality may deteriorate    e The audio setting is restored to    No Audio Sources    when you  return from the setting screen to  Live   Select the parameters  again           Memo           If you have selected a camera for which an audio source has  been set on the  Camera Settings  screen of  Camera Record  Setting   the preset audio sound is being output   c  Page 55    e If you have selected a camera for which an audio source has not  been specified  the most recently selected audio source will be  continuously output      When the recorded and live images are simultaneously  displayed  the displayed video image and audio sound may not  synchronize properly   However  this has no impact on recording  to the system or additional hard disk         E Manually Triggering an Event    To manually trigger an event  select the event in the  Event  section   and click the  Activate  button     Click           Veet a  Events     Event01 v     Activate      Server  T                              BEER  el             Memo    e For details on events  refer to  Camera Input Output Port and  Events       Page 95     e Events must be defined in advance   t  Page 95           E 
71.  the  Master  Time  area for some time    e During playback  skip playback operations may differ between a  single screen and multiple screens  Even if the selected camera  does not contain any recording  skipping will not take place as  long as recording is found in another camera  If recorded images  are not found  the last displayed image appears                 Listening to Audio Sound    To listen to recorded audio sound  select the required audio source  from the  Audio Source  list of the  Audio  section    To temporarily mute the live audio sound  select the  Mute  check  box        Audio Sources       No Audio                        Select  Browse  Screen    Note          The sound may become distorted when audio is played back  with multiple surveillance computers      The audio setting is restored to  No Audio Sources  when you  return from screen display setting to the  Live  or  Browse   screen  To listen to an audio sound  reselect an audio source  from the  Audio Source  list      There will be no audio output during still image playback or  search frame advance playback except at the speed of x 1    e When a recorded image is played back during recording  the  played back audio sound may be interrupted     Memo    e  f you have selected an camera that has been set to record an  audio sound  the specified audio sound will be output      If you have selected a camera that is not set to record an audio  sound  the most recently played back audio sound will be out
72.  the generic event on  the  Communication setting  screen        Note    e Do not alter the setting unless under special circumstances   Altering the setting unnecessarily may cause the system to  malfunction        1 Click  Communication setting  on the  Event  Audio Setting  screen    e The  Communication setting  screen appears        Communication setting     4    O   Event receive port 51234    Cancel      5   D   Transfer port 1234     3  Transfer IPaddress 127 0 0 1          Memo    e To play back an audio file  register the event with  General Event  Settings  of  Camera Record Setting        Page 100    e External device settings    e Set the port for receiving the event  51234  as the alarm  output  communication data for triggering the generic  event  destination port of the external device  such as  camera       Set the IP address of this unit as the destination IP  address  However  note that the IP address of this unit is  not 127 0 0 1    e  f the audio setting of the camera is set to the half duplex  mode  you will not be able to hear audio sound from the  camera during event audio transmission     Note     e If you configure the camera event settings on the  I O Setup   screen of  Camera Record Setting  after alarm output setting for  the generic event at the camera is complete  information of the  existing generic event will be overwritten  and this may cause the  system to malfunction    e Do not specify the same number for the  Event receive port  and   Tr
73.  the light of  the  REC  indicator goes off  press and hold the  REC  CONTROL  button      To exit the recording control mode  press and hold down the   REC CONTROL  or  REC STOP  button    e Depending on camera status or other circumstances  it may take  a while before recording starts after switching to the recording  control mode     Note    e Do not turn off the power while you are configuring the camera  recording settings              Selecting the Manual Recording Mode  1 Press the  REC STOP  button      The unit switches to the manual recording mode and  starts recording from all cameras     The  REC  indicator lights up     Memo   e To exit the manual recording mode  press and hold down the   REC STOP  button  Upon doing so  the light of the  REC    indicator goes off   e To clear all recording modes  press and hold down the  REC   STOP  button            REC  Indicator                                                        REC CONTROL  Button Indicator  REC STOP  Button    Scheduler Setting    This feature lets you specify when to switch each camera to the  online mode  as well as the online offline mode of cameras when an  event occurs     Memo    e When in the online mode  the camera executes recording  according to the camera record settings    e When in the offline mode  recording is not executed regardless  of the camera record settings    e You can specify the time zone during which e mail alerts are  triggered when motion is detected  You can also specify the
74.  the settings are changed          Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu   2 Click  Add Device         The  Device Setup Wizard  screen appears    3 Enter the IP address or DNS host name that can  be identified by the system    e To enter the DNS host name  select the  Use DNS host  name  check box and click  Next      Device Setup Wizard            Click the Port Setup    button if other than HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 is used    Pott Setup                                            Device Setup Wizard  Screen       Note       The    http port 80    followed by    FTP port 21    are used by  default  To use a different port  click  Port Setup  and specify the  required port numbers  You may need to specify a different port  if the device is located behind a NAT router or firewall  In this  case  configure the router or firewall so that it maps the ports  and IP address used by the device        86    4 if an administrator password is specified for the  device  enter the password    e The password is usually set to  root  or  admin    e Click  Next  without specifying  Autodetect Device      5 Enter a unique name for the device that has  been detected    e The device is listed in the  Device Manager    6 Click  Finish     e To view the list of cameras connected to the device  click  the plus     sign to the left of the device name     Memo    e The camera names are set as  Camera    Camera2     Camera3    Camera4      etc  by default  To change the name of  a c
75.  the software    keyboard   l  1  1    amp        172   3 475  6 778 9707  7 SEE  qiwlelriitiylulilolipl  a  Ember  c   ialsiiditfgihii TKI  73  zixiecivibinim ih       Software Keyboard    2 Move the mouse pointer over the character on  the software keyboard that you want to enter    3 Click on the character    Note     The  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button is enabled with a  click of a mouse when the software keyboard is displayed    ik          Controlling Mouse Pointer from the Front  Panel  Without Connecting a Mouse  Sold  Separately      When a mouse is not connected  you can operate the mouse  pointer from the front panel       Press the  KEY  button      The software keyboard appears   e Press the  KEY  button again to close the software  keyboard     2 Move the mouse pointer with the keypad  arrow  key       Pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button has  the same effect as clicking at the position of the mouse  pointer    ik    Memo      You can move the software keyboard by dragging any portion of  the keyboard other than the keys with the mouse      To drag the software keyboard from the front panel  press the  arrow buttons on the keypad while holding down the  16   ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button    ik     You can move the mouse pointer with the keypad when the  software keyboard is displayed              Changing Monitor  Resolution    You can switch the resolution of the VGA output using the following  procedures     e Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and
76.  this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct  the interference at his own expense     CAUTION     CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC COULD  VOID USER   S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT     REMARQUE     La plaque d   identification  num  ro de s  rie  se trouve sur le panneau  arri  re de l appareil   VR N900U     La plaque signal  tique  plaque du num  ro de s  rie  est situ  e sur le  cadre sup  rieure de l unit    VR N1600U E              CAUTION     RED color indications on the operation panel are provided but they  are not safety related  RED color indications      1  For Recording Indicator    2  For Alarm Indicator    3  For Warning Indicator                THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES   OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO  CONDITIONS   1  THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL  INTERFERENCE  AND  2  THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY  INTERFERENCE RECEIVED  INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT  MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION           SAFETY PRECAUTIONS          IMPORTANT  In the United Kingdom   Mains Supply  WARNING   THIS APPARATUS  MUST BE EARTHED    The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance  with the following code    GREEN and YELLOW   EARTH   BLUE   NEUTRAL   BROWN   LIVE   As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  apparatus may not correspond with the coloured  markings identifying the terminals in your plug  proceed  as follows   
77.  time  zone to activate automatic patrolling      Page 93  when using  PTZ cameras    e The minimum unit of time that you can specify is 5 minutes     Note       The online offline mode has no impact on the manual recording    EXT REC IN  signal recording  and emergency recording  modes    e Even when    offline    or    Event    is specified in the scheduler  the  camera switches to the    Online    mode if  Start cameras on  remote live requests  t  Page 106  is specified in  General  Settings  and live images are displayed on the  NVR Viewer     e During the interval that is set to    Offline     recording will not be  performed even when in the    Online    mode  During the interval  that is set to    Event     recording is performed according to the  recording settings when the unit switches to the    Online    mode                Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu    2 Click the  Scheduler     button     The  Scheduler     screen appears        2  Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager       HBR AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5    HBR AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2    H  R WC  192 168 0 20    Scheduler          mazoa  Button    1O Setup     Event Buttons          140 Control            Camera Recording Administator  Screen    3 Select the camera for which you want to set a  schedule from  Camera         Select a Camera                       Scheduler  Screen    Basic Operation       Recording Camera Images   continued     Scheduler Setting  continued     4 Se
78.  to configure log file settings related to client computer users        Enable Audit Select check box    Logging   Do not select  check box       Days to log   30 For specifying the number of days for storing the audit log files        Minimum Logging     For specifying the minimum time interval for acquiring logs   Interval       In Sequence     For specifying the maximum viewing time interval that is to be considered as the same  Timespan sequence                  8  Language Support and XML Encoding   Enables you to select the available languages  Select a language  local character set  for  the camera name  user name  and password  Select the language of your choice           Language 14      Traditional Chinese  Big5     Japanese  euc jp    Simplified Chinese  GB2312   Central Eastern European   ibm852    Cyrillic  ibm866      Western European  iso 8859 1   Thai iso 8859 11   Central Eastern European  iso   8859 2    Southern European  latin   iso   8859 3    Baltic  iso 8859 4    Cyrillic  iso 8859 5    Arabic  iso 8859 6    Greek  iso 8859 7    Hebrew  iso 8859 8    Turkish  iso 8859 9    Korean  ks_c_5601 1987   Japanese  shift jis   Universal UTF7   utf 7   Universal UTF8   utf 8   Central Eastern European   windows 1250    Cyrillic  windows 1251   Western European   windows   1252    Greek  windows 1253   Hebrew  windows 1255   Arabic  windows 1256    Baltic  windows 1257   Vietnamese  windows 1258   Thai  windows 874   Japanese  _iso 2022 jp ESC                    
79.  to store images in database        C always  Never    1      Conditionaly     3 seconds pre post recordings on mationjevent    Memo           Sequences refers to sequences of images that are recorded  when an event or motion is detected    e For details on using sequences  refer to  Searching Recorded  Image Using Sequence       Page 44         PTZ Camera Control    Connecting the PTZ camera to the COM port of the network  encoder  VN E4  enables the PTZ control on the live screen of the  NVR Viewer  For details on PTZ camera settings  refer to  PTZ  Camera Settings  COM1 COM2    tr Page 88     For cameras that have specified the  JCBP S  protocol in    P T Z  type controlled through COM1 COM2    of  PTZ Camera Settings   COM1 COM2    control of the iris  focus and camera menu are also  enabled on the live screen of the NVR Viewer in addition to PTZ  control     Memo   e APTZ camera is an analog camera with an analog output that  enables PTZ control via RS 485                                                                              5  Button  FUNCTION  Button      Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  5  keypad button at the same time      The  Camera Control  screen appears   2 Select the camera you want to control from the    camera selection list  and click the   Connect ENTER   button    e Camera control is enabled     The functions of the buttons are described below        Camera Control     NVR Camera 1    Connect  ENTER 2       N    HOME    Vv     
80.  to take  adequate measures                    SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN  for Germany           SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG   Anschluss am Netz   Benutzen Sie bitte diese Ma  einheit in einer passenden  Energiequelle           ACHTUNG     UM DER GEFAHR VON BR  NDEN UND  ELEKTRISCHEN SCHL  GEN VORZUBEUGEN  DARF  DIESES GER  T WEDER DEM REGEN NOCH HOHER       WARNUNG    Bei dem Ger  t handelt es sich um ein Klasse A Produkt   In Haushaltsumgebungen kann ein solches Produkt  Funkst  rungen verursachen  In einem solchen Fall muss  der Benutzer geeignete Ma  nahmen ergreifen        Sehr geehrter Kunde  sehr geehrte Kundin   dieses Ger  t stimmt mit den g  ltigen europ  ischen  Richtlinien und Normen bezuglich    FEUCHTIGKEIT AUSGESETZT WERDEN     elektromagnetischer Vertr  glichkeit und elektrischer  Sicherheit   berein        Die europ  ische Vertretung f  r die Victor Company of       ACHTUNG    Um elektrische Schl  ge zu vermeiden  das Geh  use nie    ffnen  Im Innern befinden sich keine Teile  die vom  Benutzer gewartet werden k  nnen    berlassen Sie die  Wartung qualifiziertem Service Personal        Japan  Limited ist    JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  Postfach 10 05 04   61145 Friedberg   Deutschland                   Benutzerinformationen zur Entsorgung alter Ger  te       Hinweis   Dieses Symbol  ist nur in der  Europ  ischen  Union g  ltig      Europ  ische Union     Dieses Symbol zeigt an  dass das elektrische bzw  elektronische Ger  t nicht als normaler Haushaltsabfall  ent
81.  tze  die starken Ersch  tterungen ausgesetzt sind   e Pl  tze  die zu Kondensationsbildung neigen  beispielsweise ein Fenster   e Pl  tze  die Strahlung  R  ntgenstrahlen oder   tzende Gase erzeugen    Handhabung des Recorders    WE Stapeln Sie Recorder nicht aufeinander  Dies kann zu erh  hter Ger  uschentwicklung und aufgrund von    berhitzung zu Fehlfunktionen oder zum Totalausfall der Ger  te bis hin zu Br  nden f  hren    m Blockieren Sie nicht die Bel  ftungsschlitze  Sind die   ffnungen blockiert  bildet sich im Inneren des Recorders  Hitze  wodurch ein Brand entstehen kann  Benutzen Sie den Recorder nicht in vertikaler Position  nicht auf dem  Kopf stehend  nicht mit der Front nach oben    E Legen Sie keine Gegenst  nde auf dem Recorder ab  Wenn Sie einen schweren Gegenstand  beispielsweise  einen Fernsehbildschirm oder einen gro  en Gegenstand  der   ber die Kante des Recorders hinausragt  auf den  Recorder stellen  kann dieser aus dem Gleichgewicht geraten  Dadurch besteht die Gefahr  dass der Recorder  kippt oder auf den Boden f  llt und Verletzungen verursacht    E Steigen Sie nicht auf den Recorder  Der Recorder k  nnte umfallen oder besch  digt werden  Achten Sie  besonders auf kleine Kinder    E Stellen Sie keine wasserhaltigen Gegenst  nde auf dem Recorder ab  beispielsweise Vase  Blumentopf  Gl  ser   Kosmetika oder Chemikalien   Tritt Wasser in das Innere des Recorders ein  kann dies einen Brand oder einen  Kurzschluss verursachen    EM Stecken Sie keine Fr
82.  versa                 Auto Detect Settings    This section enables you to assign an IP address to each camera  and configure various auto detect settings     Specifying IP Lease    For configuring the function to assign IP addresses to each network  camera        Note      In order to assign an IP address of the network camera using the  IP Lease feature  you need to enable the DHCP of the network  camera  For procedures to enable the DHCP of the network  camera  refer to the instruction manual of the network camera          Select  Auto Detect Setting  from  Main Menu     The  Auto Detect Settings  screen appears        D Enable O Disable P MAC CH MAKER MODEL    ODelete IP Infomation    Oup    ODown     lt   gt        OEntry    Reserve MAC Addres         Auto Detect Settings  Screen    2 Select  Enable  in  IP Lease     Memo         e  f a network uses a multiple number of NVR units  enable the  IP  Lease  only for one unit  Select  Disable  if a DHCP server is  operating on the same network    e When the  IP Lease  is enabled for two or more devices at the  same time  the IP address may change to a static address  and  cause malfunction of the cameras        3 Specify the following items under  IP Lease  Parameter        Item Description       Start Address For specifying the first IP address to be    assigned to the cameras        Unit For selecting the number of IP addresses  to be assigned to the cameras  The  selected number of IP addresses will be  assigned starting f
83.  you selected     New View  135     a    lt    amp                           Note    e Do not display more than 17 windows at any one time    VR N1600U E    e Do not display more than 10 windows at any one time    VR N900U           61    Basic Operation         2 Click the  R   butt  Screen Setup  continued  ln                                                                                                   i Shared  cim Default Group  l4   9  Default View    9 Entrance  B Private  Creating Groups and Views  continued   3 Enter a name for the new view     3 Shared a CA  4   x      Default Group elaine  4   9  Default View     Entrance  8 a    Rename  Button  3 Overwrite the existing group or view name with  anew name     8 Shared  Default Group  4   9  Default View           9 Entrance  a Q  2   x  East Side  Shortcut  B Private     Next  add cameras to the view    c Page 63  Adding Cameras to a View    E Renaming a group view    Select the group or view that you want to 40 od  rename in the Views section  Shortcut    Shared E Deleting a group or view  f Default Group  a O Defaut Viei   Select the group s  or view s  that you want to  EE Select delete from the Views section     B Private    2 Click the  X   Delete  button    A confirmation message appears to ask whether you want to delete  the selected group and all views inside the group  or whether you  want to delete the selected views     a o A   x     Shortcut        62       Adding Cameras to a View    Select a view   
84. 0E        etwa 7 7 kg  VR N900U     VIII    Getting Started       Features    Automatic detection of network cameras    Significantly reduces the hassle of complex camera registration  procedures     Built in large capacity hard disk  500 GB   VR   N1600U E     Built in hard disk  250 GB   VR N900U     Supports HDD expansion    You can add 250 GB HDD for internal of VR N900U  and 500 GB HDD  for internal of VR N1600U E     For external  up to 2 TB HDD units can be added for both models of VR     N900U and VR N1600U E     Simultaneous recording up to 9 channels at 120  ips  VR N900U     Equipped with 4 channel analog input  VR   N900U     Display performance of 60 ips and distribution  performance of 30 ips  VR N900U     Enables simultaneous recording and playback    Playback of recorded images  jog dial playback and skip playback are  possible while recording is in progress     Direct Search    Enables you to retrieve data of a specific date time or alarm position  speedily     Power failure recovery record    If a power failure occurs during recording  the system resumes  recording in the mode selected before the power failure after recovery     Alarm recording    Enables recording to start automatically in the alarm recording mode  when alarm signal input is received during recording     Motion Detect    Enables recording to start automatically when    motion    is detected in  the preset live image  You can also specify the detection area for each  camera     Alarm Mail No
85. 1 connection terminal  camera network     For connecting to the IP camera  sold separately  network using a  LAN cable     14                      Color Status   Left Orange   Off Not connected to the network   Indicator On Connected to the network    Blinking   Communicating   Right Green   Off Communicating at 10 Mbit   Indicator second    On Communicating at 100 Mbit    second        Orange   Blinking   Communicating at 1 Gbit   second                        28   LAN2  LAN2 connection terminal  Intranet   For connecting to the remote PC network using a LAN cable                    Color Status  Left Green   Off Not connected to the network   Indicator Blinking   Connected to the network   Right Green   Off Not communicating   Indicator                Blinking   Communicating              Connector cover    Memo        e Do not remove the cover             Signal input output terminals    For operating VR N1600U E using external alarm signals or signals  received from external devices  or for operating external devices by  outputting signals     Memo        e Diameter of applicable cable  AWG22 to AWG28          Rear I O Terminals           8         ji     9  ue 8          Fl  N  zozu  155  Zu  0123 2100  ZeoNZzo0oJ zz  Ssy5SsS2552  9   cc Zro  ALARMIN   S amp      SE er SS   r Wk ata  Sixaoistmaaoo   TANOTMONR OW TWOOtTSLOOOO   ao ann 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nn                                      I                                                                      
86. 25U VN C655U  set  the password for connecting VN C625U VN C655U on the  camera unit as well as this unit again  For details on the setting  procedures  refer to the  INSTRUCRTIONS  of the camera in  use and procedures for setting the root password on the  Edit  device settings  screen in this manual      Page 87     e The audio setting is restored to    No Audio Sources    when you  return from the setting screen to  Live   Set the audio parameters  again           Select a Camera      Select a camera by clicking on the bar at the  upper end of the screen of the camera to select  using the mouse      When you have selected a camera  the blue bar at the top  of each live image changes to a lighter blue tone      Outputs     Section   Event  Section                      Live  Screen   PTZ Control  Section   Audio  Section       Memo        e When you have selected a camera  the blue bar at the top of  each live image changes to a lighter blue tone  This bar comes  with a tri color square indicator  which indicates the following  features  as well as characters that indicate the operating status  of the camera     D Event indicator  Left  yellow   Lights up when events specified in the  Camera Record  Setting  occur  The indicator appears black if event  indication has not been specified for the camera in  question  or if no specified event has occurred       Motion indicator  Center  red   Lights up when motion is detected      Online indicator  Right indicator  Green   Blinks
87. 5 0     33 49 98 470   8 0     63 95 187   5 0     102 152 298                  16 Channel Recording No Audio Recording External HDD  1 TB x1 Unit                                                               Hour   Image Data Image  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 0     49 74  Quality 24 0     67 100  Settings 20 0   80 120  16 0     101 151  QVGA 27 0     59 88  15 0     108 162  8 0     204 306  5 0     327 491            16 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording External HDD  1 TB x1 Unit                                                                                       Hour   Image Data Image  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size 30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 0     49 74  Quality 24 0     66 99  Settings 20 0   80 120  16 0     100 150  QVGA 27 0     59 88  15 0     107 160  8 0     202 302  5 0     323 481  Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format   24 to 168 169 to 720 Note    1 dayto 1week 1 week to 1 1 month to 3 3 months or   Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10    month months longer according to the condition of the hard disk and the images    142    recorded     Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk             8 Channel Recording No Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                                  Hour   Image Data lmage  kB  Frame rate per channel  per second  ips     Size 30 15 10 5 3 1  Picture VGA 32 0 15
88. AUDIO  IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  on the rear panel are allocated as  Audio1  and   Audio2  in  N900  192 168 201 12  on the  Device Manager     Note       f the camera specified in the  Target Database  item    is set to     Disable     audio sound is not recorded    e To play back audio sound of the camera selected using NVR  Viewer  you need to specify the audio source on the  Settings      screen under  Camera Record Setting       Page 55                       You can also specify audio settings using the following  operation     Click the     mark beside the device with an audio source       Select the audio source and right click on it  Click  Edit  and  specify the settings accordingly on the  Audio Device  Settings  screen        2 Select an audio source from  Device Manager   and  press the  Settings     button       The  Audio Device Settings  screen appears   e Audio sound is indicated using a microphone icon             Audio Device Settings      mm     Device name    Audio 1 D          Target Database  lic   Camera 3        e Specify the setting for the following items        Precautions when enabling the analog audio  source of VR N1600U E    When entering a device for  Target Database  in the  Audio1  and   Audio2  settings of NVR  make use of an input channel that is  after the channel for recording the audio device of the selected  device     Example     O VN E4 Audio1    E4 Camera2  NVR Audio1    VN E4  Camera1    x VN E4 Audioi    E4 Camera1  NVR Audio1    VN E4  Cam
89. AnalogInput  settings  NTSC PAL   a message indicating     ENCODE ERROR format     will appear  In this case  click the   OK  button using the mouse to hide the    ENCODE  ERROR format     message  followed by specifying the NTSC   PAL selection for  AnalogInput  correctly    e For details on how to use the mouse  refer to  Character Input  and Mouse Pointer      Page 28            4 Click  Entry     5 Click  OK      The  Camera Record Setting  screen appears     6 Click the  Close  button on the  Camera Record  Setting  screen    e The Default View is automatically created  To save this  view  change its name     Memo      The Default View created by the Auto Detect feature may  change the camera placement in the view  To maintain a fixed  position  name the view and save it     Note     e Select    Do not detect in the future     check box on the  Detect  Device  screen during the Auto Detect operation if you do not  want the  Detect Device  screen of that camera to appear during  subsequent Auto Detect operations  For cameras that you have  excluded from detection  you can add      Page 86  them again  manually at a later time                 Memo     The camera at the top of the list is used with priority        114       Language Setting    This option enables you to specify the language you want to use   Memo          The functions and GUI  graphical user interface  are the same  as the  Selecting a language       Page 23  screen that is  displayed when this unit is fir
90. Audio Setting  of the main menu   Password    c  Page 130        126    Audio Transmission  l Start up the NVR Viewer to check the live  images of the camera  e With the wallpaper or main menu displayed  press the   LIVE BROWSE  button to start up the NVR Viewer     2 Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  7     keypad button at the same time  to start up the  Audio Transmission  screen               Audio Transmission       Single Mode 3   Device  Camera Name     NWR  Gamera 17 v  Status Information    Destination Status   NVR  Gamera 17 Disconnected    4  Dt         Audio Transmission  Screen    3 Select an audio transmission mode    e There are two audio transmission modes  namely  Multi  Mode  and  Single Mode    Multi Mode  enables you to  send out audio sound to multiple cameras at one time    Single Mode  sends out audio sound to only one camera    e In the case of  Multi Mode   select the camera for receiving  the audio data on the  Event Audio Setting  screen of the  main menu  Select     Multi Mode    from the list at the left  end of the  Event Audio Setting  screen  and select the  checkbox corresponding to the camera for receiving the  audio data   t    Page 128    e In the case of  Single Mode   you can select the camera  for receiving the audio data in   Device Camera Name     e The camera that is receiving the audio sound appears on  the  Status Information  list        4 Press the  Connect  button to connect to the  camera and start audio trans
91. CTS IP DES  TOP CONTF   LLER        Pat ona  tess eee          Joystick  List       v     Axis Setup  Section        Button Setup  Section       4 Specify the settings for each axis in the  Axis  Setup  section    Z axis                                                 Joystick    140                                  Item Description     Invert By default  the PTZ camera moves to the  right when you push the joystick to the right  along the X axis  and moves up when you  pull the joystick towards you along the Y   axis  The movements are reversed if you  select  Invert        Absolute By selecting    Absolute     the angle of the  joystick corresponds to the direction of the  camera       Action For specifying the action when you move  the joystick    PTZ Pan Moves the camera horizontally  PTZ Tilt Moves the camera vertically  PTZ Zoom Zooms in or zooms out the camera  No Action No action    Preview You can check how each camera moves on  Image each axis with the joystick              5 Assign an action to each joystick button in the   Button Setup  section    e Select the action to assign in the  Action  field     Disabling Joystick Operation    To disable the joystick operation  select the  Disable all joysticks   check box        Configuring NAS    I Click  HDD Utility  under  Main Menu    c  Page 116     e The  HDD Utility  screen appears   2 Click  Details   3 Enter the  User name  and  Password  that are    configured on the NAS device for access to NAS  in  NAS User Set
92. Cancel Cancels all settings and closes the  Event    Audio Setting  screen   Memo          The password at the receiving end  specified on the  Password  screen  cannot be canceled                 128       Audio Copying    Memo              seconds                             Item Description  This feature enables you to copy  register with this unit   delete     Audio For selecting the camera for audio playback  perform test play  and record audio files used on the  Event Audio playing for    during test play of audio files  Select a camera  Setting  screen  Format supported is G711 u law monaural sound  IPaddress   by ticking the corresponding check box  You  Playback time up to 300 seconds is supported  can sort the order of the list accordingly by  clicking  Audio playing for  or  IP address       Set the audio file playback time to an interval not longer than 180    Close Closes the  Audio file utility  screen   The  Close  button cannot be selected during  addition  deletion  test play  or recording of an  audio file   1 Click  Audio files copy  on the  Event Audio             Setting  screen     Audio files   The G711u law monaural format audio files  stored on this unit are displayed     The  Audio file utility  screen appears  Memo   Een   e To stop playback while it is in progress   m           press the  ALARM CLEAR  button   Alertl wav  wer   Delete To delete an audio file from the USB memory       0 ies m    Audio playing for   NVR  Camera 17 127 001            
93. IP  address  automatically    Select check box      Do not select check  box       IP address      192 168 0 253       Subnet Mask      255 255 255 0                            Default Gateway     0 0 0 0   Perferred DNS   0 0 0 0   Server   Alternate DNS   0 0 0 0   Server   Host Name VR N1600U E  vr n1600  VR N900U  vr n900   DNS Domain   0 0 0 0   Name       Memo    e To specify an IP address other than the default value  consult your system  administrator    e  f the host name is changed  you need to add a new Windows user in  User  Administration  under  Image Server Setting        Page 118    e Do not set the default gateway for both the camera network and Intranet on the   OS Setting  screen  Doing so may cause the system to malfunction                   When specifying LAN2  Intranet  settings       Item    Preset Values    Description        DNetwork adapter  interface name   continued     Intel  8225xER PCI Adapter    Settings when you are using LAN2  Intranet         Obtain an IP  address  automatically    Select check box      Do not select check  box       IP address      192 168 1 253    Memo           Subnet Mask      255 255 255 0    e To specify an IP address other than the default value  consult your system       Default Gateway      192 168 1 254    administrator   e  f the host name is changed  you need to add a new Windows user in  User       Administration  under  Image Server Setting       Page 118   e Do not set the default gateway for both the camera 
94. JVC   Reproduction or copy of this manual  in part or in whole   without the prior consent of JVC is strictly prohibited    e Product names used in this manual are the trademarks or  registered trademarks of the respective companies   Symbols such as          and    are omitted in this manual      Milestone and XProtect Enterprise are the registered  trademarks of Milestone Systems  Inc    e Designs  specifications and other details used in this  manual may be modified for improvement without prior  notice    e Images and illustrations of VR N1600U E are used in the  explanation of this manual except for some special cases   When images or illustrations of VR N900U are used  the  model name is indicated at the top right corner of the  illustration                 E End User License Agreement for Milestone s Software embedded in JVC s NVR products    This license agreement is a legally binding agreement among you  You  either an individual or a single entity   Milestone  Systems A S  Milestone  and Victor Company of Japan  Limited  JVC  for the software product embedded in JVC s  Network Video Recorder NVR  products  Software   which may include associated software components  media  printed  materials  and online or electronic documentation  if any  By using JVC s NVR product incorporating the Software  you  agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement    The Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties  as well as other intellectual proper
95. K  button    e Windows users need to define a Windows user for each host  name specified in  Host Name  in  OS Setting   As the user s  host name is not displayed on the  User Administration  screen   it is recommended that you delete the Windows user and add  again if you have changed the host name     Memo        e To edit a preset user name or password  select the user to edit  from the  Current isers groups  list  and click the  Change    password     button     e To delete a preset user  select the user from the  Current isers   groups  list  and click the  Delete  button  The user that has been  deleted from the list is no longer able to login to NVR Viewer    e After adding a new user in  Add Basic User      a small square  appears to the top left of the icon on the  User Administration   screen  You can distinguish between  Add Basic User     and   Add Windows User     using this mark when the same user  name is registered with both        E Defining User Rights    T Select  Restrict user access  in the  User  Administration  section    2 Click  User Access        a ImageServer Administrator    Server Configuration    Name   Server    Port    80  Enable Outside Access      Outside IP Address     Outside Port        Max  number of clients     User Administration    Define Username and Jissword     Full access fi all users       Log Files  Days to log    10       Audit Log  Enable Audit Logging        Days to log   Minimum Logging Interval   In Sequence Timespan     Lan
96. List    List of Menu Screens     c  Page 69     Password     Current Password OChange  New Password    New Psccwod rotor  Eau Logon    OOK    ive Viewine Mail Send List     H Live Viewing Auto Start ee    ODelete    Error Report  Ebie  Emai    ecard Cantal    TION at startup pi One    Fort Number User TD Passnord    SMTP Server      POP Server m    SMTP Authentication  NONE   OSend Test Mail    Eneresrcy Record    Tine of Resard Blseconds v     c  Page 72   Main Menu noe oe    Network adapter interface name  C Automatically synchronize wth an Internat server     Unit Setting INSIR  825660M Gigabit Network Connection vl Server     OS Setting ent      Page 111     Physical Address OO LSICBHALBALEE NTP Paling interval    Minte    Flash Memory Utility  lotta ant address extomaticaly Date  am       HDD Utility      Page 116  nese 120 0 25    me a    Event Audio Setting eee sacks 255  255  255   0 tine Zone   Z  Auto Summertime adjustment      Language Setting a a   Defauk Gateway 0 0 0 0  GMT  Gisenwich Mean Tine   Dubin  Ednburgh  Le W    Return to default settings  r  Page 11 5     Update Now    Image Server Setting    Page 11 7  Preferred DNS Server  0 0 0 0 ae    I Mternato DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Device volume         Live Viewing He nis ra    Auto Detect Setting EI an   SAVE changes      Camera Record Setti     ce Page 128   VR N1600U E only      Exit Event Conditional expression    Arm   fire    Rerew   Operation     Up    Down  Enter  Enter Cancel   Exit Alm a rene  Blam 3 reme
97. ME  key to move to the home  position  Jik    E Zoom In Zoom Out      Press the  PTZ PRESET  button to switch the  keypad to the PTZ mode    e The  PTZ PRESET  indicator lights up    e Press the button to switch between the    PTZ Mode      indicator lights up  and    Preset Mode     indicator  blinking      2 Press the  15 ZOOM IN  ZOOM IN ENTER  or  14   ZOOM OUT  ZOOM OUT CANCEL  button   k    E Using Preset Positions    1 Press the  PTZ PRESET  button to switch the  keypad to the Preset mode    e The  PTZ PRESET  indicator starts blinking    e Press the button to switch between the    PTZ Mode      indicator lights up  and    Preset Mode     indicator  blinking      2 Enter the preset number using the keypad    e Enter using the  1  to  16  keys in the case of VR N1600U   E  and  0  to  9  in the case of VR N900U   e The camera moves to the preset position     Memo     You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing   10 0  followed by a number from  10 0  to  9    VR N1600U E      You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing    0  followed by a number from  0  to  9    VR N900U   e To specify a number beyond 20  use the mouse to make a  selection from the  Presets   list in the  PTZ Control  section     Note   e You need to specify the preset positions in advance in order to  use the preset feature   Page 92  Defining a Preset Position               35    Basic Operation       Viewing Live Images via  Mouse Control    This section describes t
98. Network and Internet Connections       Network Connections      amp  Control Panel  Eile Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help    O     B  seh  Py rolders   EEE      ess   Control Panel       E Control Panel Pick a category     amp  Switch to Classic view  y  N Appearance and Themes    See Also A   lt     BD inter ond other narware    User accounts      Windows Update   Q  Help and Support       Other Control Panel  Options    a    Network and Internet     Connections        Fo Add or Remove Programs    6  Sounds  Speech  and Audio iy ont    Date  Time  Language  and  Regional Options    w 59  Performance and Maintenance   fj Security Center       Network and Internet Connections  Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Qa       B Peach  gt  Folders  Fiz   ess    gt  Network and Internet Connections  s    See Also   g  g       Network and Internet Connections     amp  My Network Places  gD Printers and Other  are    Pick a task       9 Remote Desktop A f P x  et up or change your Internet connection  Be Phone and Modem Options Bl setup ge yi io     E  Create a connection to the network at your workplace    Troubleshooters  By Set up or change your home or small office network     ZI Home or Small Office  B  Set up a wireless network for a home or small office  tworking mi    2  Internet Explorer  B  Change Windows Firewall settings    2  Network Diagnostics    or pick a Control Panel icon    pe  y Internet Options    s     Network Connections  s       Windows Firewall    A Network Se
99. R Viewer as well as the internal  distribution server     Memo     When  Auto Logon  is enabled  the login operation starts  automatically immediately after logging out    t Page 69  Unit Setting           13    Getting Started       Part Names and Functions   VR N1600U E   continued     Rear Panel                                                                          POWER  switch  Switches the power on or off   Memo        e Be sure to press and hold down the  OPERATE  button on the  front panel to shut down the system before switching off the  power supply           AC IN 120V   240VH 50Hz 60Hz  power input  terminal    Connect to an AC120   240 V outlet using the power cable  supplied         AUDIO IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  audio input terminals 1 2   RCA     Connect to the audio output terminal of the device from which audio  signals are to be recorded         AUDIO OUT  audio output terminal  RCA     Outputs live sound in the live viewing mode   Outputs recorded sound in the playback mode        Memo     There is no audio output when playing back still images  when    running searches other than x1  or when playing back frame by     frame           VGA OUT  VGA output terminal  Outputs live images  recorded images and the menu screens     D  SERIAL1 to 4  serial terminals 1 to 4    For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse   sold separately   flash memory  sold separately   UPS  sold  separately  or additional disk drive  sold separately       X   LAN1  LAN
100. Rate  specified under  Recording Settings  is used as  the display rate for live images     Memo    e Use the  SKIP  to move between the setting items      Using the  2 4  or  10 0 4  8    button to select a parameter  Jik     To enter numeric characters  press the  SELECT  button to turn  on the  SELECT  indicator  After entering the numeric  characters  press the  PTZ PRESET  button to turn on the  PTZ   PRESET  indicator              Use the  SKIP  button to select  OK   followed by  pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button   ik    12 Repeat Step 10 for each camera    13 Use the  SKIP  button to select  Close    followed by pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN   ENTER  button   k      Setting is complete and the  Live  screen appears   e The  REC CONTROL  indicator lights up  and recording  starts in the recording control mode       Page 52     Memo    e For details on the recording control mode  refer to  Recording  Camera Images   t  Page 52       You can specify decimal values using the software keyboard              IPX PTZ Pe                      E Digtal Zuom                 Live  Screen    2     Preparation       System Connection  Example    The following operations are possible with this system     e Surveillance of up to 16 cameras  VR N1600U E  9 cameras  VR N900U   live image  recording and playback       Checking recorded images on the VGA monitor  e Recording Playing sound       Transmitting audio data to a designated camera  VR N1600U E     e Alarm recording
101. TB HDD upgrade   Hour   Image Data lmage Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 15  32  24  VGA 16  10  27  15  VGA  QVG 8  5    9 channel recording with 2 channel audio recording and one additional 1 TB HDD upgrade   Hour   Image Datallmage Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 15  32  24  VGA 16  10  27  15  VGA  QVG 5  5  Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format   2410 168   jp teat 720  I Baer    Tdayto Tweek 1weekto 1 1 month to 3 3 months or   Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10   according  month months to the condition of the hard disk and the images recorded     144            Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk                                                     9 Channel Recording No Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                                           Hour   Image Data Image Frame rate per channel  per second  ips   Size  kB  30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 31 62 93  Quality 24 42 83 125  Settings 16 63 126 189  10 102 203 305  QVGA 27 37 74 111  15 67 135 202  8 127 254 381            9 Channel Recording 2 Channel Audio Recording No Additional HDD                                         Hour   Image Data Image Frame rate per channel  per second  ips     Size  kB  30 15 10  Picture VGA 32 31 62 92  Quality 24 41 82 123  Settings 16 63 124 185  10 100 198 293  QVGA 27 37 73 109  15 67 132 197  8 125 246 363  5 199 387                     
102. Triggering Outputs    To trigger an output  select the output in the  Outputs     section  and  click the  Activate  button        Outp             Outputs     Pas  Select Output    LH E    lt      Live  Screen       Click    Memo   e Outputs must be defined in advance     t Page 98  Specifying an Output        Page 103  Specifying Output During Manual Control            E Camera Shortcut Menus    You can right click on one of the images from the camera to access  the shortcut menu    Items in the shortcut menu may vary according to the configuration  of the selected camera     Ba Copy  SB Camera          ________ _q                p gt  PTZ Presets                    __ 8        EB i   i  nun   y Send Camera              0                                      Item Description  D Camera Displays the video image of another  camera in the selected position   2  Sound Temporarily mutes warning sounds   Notifications  3  PTZ Presets   Moves the camera to the preset position  you have selected   4  Matrix Select this option to use the Milestone  XProtect Matrix feature   Memo    e For details  refer to the Milestone  XProtect Matrix manual available on the  website of Milestone Systems  http     www milestonesys com    e The URL address may be subject to  changes         Send Sends images from the selected camera to  Camera another single camera position in an open  view              39    Basic Operation       Playing Back Recorded  Images via Front Panel  Control  This section d
103. a  Characters to the left  of the indicator        Display Status       When live images are displayed without  being recorded    Live  Green        Recording  Red    When recording is in progress       Stop  Yellow  When images are not acquired from the  camera  or when the camera is in the    offline mode  t  Page 53                 e You can press the  ALARM CLEAR  button to hide the event  indicator and motion indicator      The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the  name of the device to which the camera is connected    e Entering the number of the selected camera switches to an  enlarged display  To return to normal display  enter the camera  number of the enlarged display  You can identify the camera  number of the  Camera Record Setting  screen of the main  menu        Operating the Camera    PTZ stands for pan  tilt and zoom    If the camera supports the PTZ functions  you can use the keypad   and the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  and  13 CANCEL  ZOOM   OUT CANCEL  buttons to move the camera up down  tilt   left right   pan   or enlarge reduce the image  zoom     ik    E Pan Tilt      Press the  PTZ PRESET  button to switch the  keypad to the PTZ mode    e The  PTZ PRESET  indicator lights up    e Press the button to switch between the    PTZ Mode      indicator lights up  and    Preset Mode     indicator  blinking      2 Press the 1 to 9 key on the keypad    e Pans Tilts in the direction indicated by the arrow on the  keys    e Press the  6 HOME  5 HO
104. a  third party  Before the transfer  that party must agree that these license terms apply to the transfer and use of the software   You may not retain any copies of the software including the backup copy     Not Fault Tolerant   The software is not fault tolerant  JVC installed the software on the device and is responsible for how it operates on the device     10 Restricted Use     The Microsoft software was designed for systems that do not require fail safe performance  You may not use the Microsoft  software in any device or system in which a malfunction of the software would result in foreseeable risk of injury or death to any  person  This includes operation of nuclear facilities  aircraft navigation or communication systems and air traffic control     1 1 No Warranties for the Software     The software is provided    asis      You bear all risks of using it  Microsoft gives no express warranties  guarantees or  conditions  Any warranties you receive regarding the device or the software do not originate from  and are not binding on   Microsoft or its affiliates  When allowed by your local laws  JVC and Microsoft exclude implied warranties of merchantability   fitness for a particular purpose and non infringement        12 Liability Limitations     You can recover from Microsoft and its affiliates only direct damages up to two hundred fifty U S  Dollars  U S   250 00   You  cannot recover any other damages  including consequential  lost profits  special  indirect or incide
105. a when you press this button in the  playback mode  Press and hold it to jump to the last image in the  database of the selected camera     Memo              Sequence    indicates a certain block of images that are recorded  during motion detection      Recorded images are stored in the database     Database    refers  to data recorded in this unit          Jog dial  Plays back a single frame when it is rotated in the playback mode         Shuttle dial    The position of the dial specifies the playback speed and playback  direction when in the playback mode  Playback speed is selectable  from x 1 20  x 1 5  x 1  x 2  x 5  x 10 and x 20 according to the  angle        REC  Indicator    Lights up during recording  Flashes during EMERGENCY or EXT  REC IN recording        Center panel   Do not remove the cover       Keypad buttons Indicator    0  to  9    Selects the camera input when viewing live images and when  playing back recorded images    The indicator that corresponds to the selected camera input lights  up during camera selection mode    Used to move the camera to the specified position during PTZ  mode  to enter the preset number during PRESET mode and to  narrow down the search date  month  week and time in the search  mode  You can move the mouse cursor when the software keyboard  is displayed  When the main menu is displayed  press the  2    or   8 4  button to move the option highlight  These buttons are also  used as numeric keys          LIVE BROWSE  Button Indicat
106. aintain   If this check box is selected  images will not be    Image stretched to fit the size of the display position   Aspect Images will be displayed in the aspect ratio  Ration  horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen  that          they have been recorded           Note          The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the  picture quality  The  Image  settings may affect the recording  performance  As such  use this function with the value fixed at     Full         When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during  playback  the frame rate setting is    disabled      Searching  Recorded Image Using the Timeline Browser   rs Page 44        66       Using the  Html Page   1 Click  Html Page  under  System Overview              gt   1   AXIS 207W  Camera 1     gt   2   JVC   Camera 2      3   AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3   3 Carousel    Hntennt 2B  a       AJ Image 33h  EB Matrix              Screen Setup  Screen   Html Page           2 Drag and drop at the required position using the  mouse     The  Open URL  screen appears        Enter the URL or path to a HTML page on the Internet  your  computer  or your network that you want to display     Open     Browse       Cancel       3 Type in the URL and click  OK     4 Select  Html Page  under  Views   and specify  the properties in the  Properties  section                            Item Description  Url Click the  New     button to specify a new URL   Scaling Select the display size of the HTML page   Ena
107. also be used for remote surveillance of this unit from a PC      Page 125   e Some of the NVR Viewer features may vary during remote surveillance from a PC      Live  Tab View List     Views  Section     S ue  x ee E getup    amp         Defaut view                                            x  Button             NVR Viewer Live  Screen       Memo      NVR Viewer operates by logging into the distribution server  inside this unit      The built in NVR Viewer logs into the distribution server of this  unt  http   localhost or http   127 0 0 1   By default   Auto Login   to this unit is set to  On   For details on the login procedures   refer to  Connecting to a Computer   ce Page 120       The NVR Viewer is unable to log in when the maximum number  of clients are connected to the surveillance computer     Note          When you have changed the settings in the  Camera Record  Setting  of the main menu  log out of the NVR Viewer  and log in  again    gt  Page 125      When in the default state  you can click the  Connect  button on  the  Connect to Server  screen to log in    When settings are changed  refer to the description after Step 2  of  Login to the NVR Viewer       Page 124       When the following symptoms appear  recovery may be possible  by restarting the NVR Viewer    e Live video and playback images appear in black     NVR Viewer action is slow   e NVR Viewer does not respond        Note   e You can restart the NVR Viewer using the following procedure  In  this cas
108. amera  Record Setting        Page 84           STOP PB   Button  Stops playback when you press this button in the playback mode       PLAY  Button    Plays back at the speed and in the direction specified by the Shuttle Dial  position       SKIP  Button   H   lt 4    Press to move the item selection in the reverse direction in the menu or  settings screen  Jumps to the beginning of the previous sequence on  the selected camera when you press this button in the playback mode     Press and hold it to jump to the first image in the database of the  selected camera    E   gt  gt    Press to move the item selection in the forward direction in the menu or  settings screen  Jumps to the beginning of the next sequence on the  selected camera when you press this button in the playback mode   Press and hold it to jump to the last image in the database of the  selected camera     Memo              Sequence    indicates a certain block of images that are recorded  during motion detection       Recorded images are stored in the database     Database    refers to  data recorded in this unit           Jog dial   Plays back a single frame when it is rotated in the playback mode      Shuttle dial   The position of the dial specifies the playback speed and playback  direction when in the playback mode  Playback speed is selectable from  x 1 20  x 1 5  x 1  x 2  x 5  x 10 and x 20 according to the angle       REC  Indicator   Lights up during recording  Flashes during EMERGENCY or EXT REC  IN r
109. amera  This is the frame rate  during speedup recording  Specify the frame rates such that the total rate of all cameras  displayed in each view of the  Live  screen does not exceed 80 ips  image per second  for VR   N1600U E and 60 ips for VR N900U    Note      Do not set a value that exceeds the camera   s capacity     e  f the frame rate is not specified for the camera  a frame rate that is supported by the  camera is automatically set                  Live Settings                      Frame Rate Same as recording   Displays the viewing frame rate of the  Live Viewing  screen     Same sa speedup   Same sa speedup   Displays live images using the frame rate specified in the  Speedup Settings  item D    Same as recording   Displays live images using the frame rate specified in the  Recording Settings  item       When speedup is set to    ON    and the recording frame rate increases such as due to  detection of motion  the live viewing rate also increases      Camera Show Motion Select the    Disabled    checkbox to disable the camera   Monitor Show Regions Memo   Setup Update on motion only      Show Motion        Show Regions    and    Update on motion only    cannot be selected     Disabled    Audio Audio1 You can select the audio source to play back when a camera is selected in the NVR Viewer   Source You can also specify the audio source in the NVR Viewer if the audio source is included in the    source to be exported in the  Database Export     format   Page 47  Writin
110. amera  select the device and click the camera name      The camera number increases in sequence as new cameras are  added      Registration of the cameras can also be performed  automatically   sPage 113  Auto Detect Settings            Analog Cameras  VR N900U     In VR N900U  analog input circuitry is considered a network  encoder  IP video server   and the IP address is set to  192 168 201 12    This is registered as     N900  192 168 201 12     on the Device  Manager of the  Camera Record Setting  screen  Cameras  connected to the  VIDEO IN1 to 4  input terminal at the rear  correspond to Cameras 1 to 4 of    N900     You can alter the default  name    N900    using the  Edit Device     button  However  the IP  address    192 168 201 12    cannot be changed     Memo    e Audio signals that are input to  AUDIO IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  on the  rear panel are allocated as  Audio1  and  Audio2  in   N900  192 168 201 12  on the  Device Manager            Adding an Analog Camera  VR N900U     To add an analog camera manually when using VR N900U  specify     192 168 201 12    as the IP address on the  Edit device settings   screen  As no password has been specified  leave the password  entry field blank and continue to the next step    Analog cameras are already added on VR N900U by default        Editing Device Settings    This section describe the procedures to edit the settings of added  devices       Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu    e The  Camera Recording Admi
111. amera switches automatically to the  online mode when the live screen of NVR  Viewer is displayed  During the interval when  the scheduler is set to offline  recording will  not be performed even if this feature is in the  online mode    Note     e  When    Start cameras on remote live  requests    is selected  the camera  switches to the online mode while you are  viewing live images  Depending on the  settings when in the recording control  mode  recording may start when you start  viewing live images  This also applies to  viewing live images on a surveillance  computer    Create default   Select this check box to automatically create  schedule for   the online schedule of the camera in the  new cameras    Scheduler  at all times       Page 53      Event Do not change   Recording  Settings    Logfile Do not change   Settings                E mail nn                                     E   Mail setup   MV Enable E Mail  Monitor                Sender Settings  Sender e mail address   Outgoing mail  SMTP  server name   I Server requires login  3   Time btw  mails  minutes    0               E mal setup  Screen       Item Description        D Enable E  Select this check box to enable sending of  mail Monitor    e mail alerts           Recipient S    For specifying the e mail addresses to  send alerts to  If you are specifying more  than one e mail address  separate the e   mail addresses using semicolons                                         3  Sender For specifying the send
112. ameras does not  exceed 80 ips  VR N1600U E  60 ips  VR N900U        The default display rate is set at 8 ips  The maximum  display performance of 80 ips will be exceeded if 11 or  more cameras are detected  In this case  you will need to  adjust the display rate of each camera using the following  steps   VR N1600U E      The default display rate is set at 8 ips  The maximum  display performance of 60 ips will be exceeded if 8 or  more cameras are detected  In this case  you will need to  adjust the display rate of each camera using the following  steps   VR N900U     Note      The recording rate may drop if the total display rate of all  cameras exceeds 80 ips  VR N1600U E  60 ips  VR N900U               Memo   e For cameras with the    Analog In    message  analog cameras    proceed to Step 7  Password is not required   VR N900U        8 After password entry is complete  press  KEY   again the close the software keyboard    9 Use the  SKIP  button to select  OK   followed by  pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER   button   k    10 Repeat the steps from 5 to 7 for every detected  camera       The  Camera Record Setting  screen appears        20 Camera Recording Administrator    ge  F BQ AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5   E BR axis 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2        H BR WC  192 168 0 20     l 59 wwe  127 0 0 1        YO Setup       Event Buttons       Generic Events          YO Control                            Press the  SKIP  button to select Device Manager  eThe device at the top is se
113. ansfer port               Item Description         Event For specifying the port number for receiving    communication data for triggering the generic                   receive  port event issued by an external device     Transfer For specifying the port number to transfer  port communication data to   Memo     Specify the same port as Main  Menu    Camera Record Setting   gt  I O  Setup  Details  Network  Settings    Alert Port       Page 98      Transfer For specifying the IP address to transfer the  IPaddress   generic event to   Specify the unit itself using  127 0 0 1     OK Closes the  Communication setting  screen     After setting is complete  press the  Renew   button on the  Event Audio Setting  screen to  enable the new settings             Cancel Closes the  Communication setting  screen    without doing anything                 131    Others       Compatible Equipment    Make sure that peripheral devices are used in accordance with their  operating environment     Compatible Network Cameras       Function  jpg   prz   Audo PTZ   mpeg   VMD  IP cameras Joystick Event       JVC  VN V25U       JVC  VN V26U       JVC  VNV686U       JVC  VN C20       JVC  VN C655       JVC  VN C625       JVC  VN E4       JVC  VN C215       AXIS 206       AXIS 207       AXIS 211       AXIS 212       AXIS 213       AXIS 214       AXIS 216          AXIS 225       Verint S1700       Verint S1704       Verint S1708       Verint S1900                            Verint S2700E             Mem
114. appears           Click       E Viewing Data on a Specific Date Time Using  Timeline    The vertical timeline indicates the progress status of a recording  operation        seti   Timeline    7 5 2007  7 08 44 AM       1 Drag the mouse pointer upwards or downwards  on the Timeline    e You can view data at the specified date time while  checking the images     Data Playback Stopping Data Playback  E Playback    Set the playback speed using the speed control    2 Click the Play button    The database is played back at the specified speed           Speed Control       Play Button  Stop Button  E Stopping Playback   1 Click the Stop button  e Data playback stops     Exiting the Export Viewer  1 Go to the Start menu  and select  File   Close   e Ends the Export Viewer     Memo    e You can also click   x  on the right side of the screen to exit the  Export Viewer    e For details of the viewer  refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart  Client User   s Manual available on the website of Milestone  Systems  http   www milestonesys com       The URL address may be subject to changes           159    Others       Customizing Joystick  Settings    1 Click the  V  button at the top right corner of the  screen          rw Oo Do      V  Button      Joystick Setup    EY Keyboard Setup      EBEN  2 Select  Joystick Setup  from the menu that  appears          006 3 06 08 706 PM       3 Selecta joystick from the selected joystick list         Disable al joysticks    Selected Joystick   CH PRODU
115. arger than 11              User    Administration    This section describes procedures to configure user accounts and rights                                   User Setup        Click this button to display the  User Administration  screen for setting the  User  and   Password   You can add new users in two ways   e    Page 118  User Settings    Memo    e After adding a new user  a small square appears to the top left of the icon on the   User Administration  screen  You can distinguish between  Add Basic User     and   Add Windows User     using this mark when the same user name is registered  with both   User VR N1600U E vr n1600 Type Basic user  VR N900U vr n900 Password vr n1600 VR N1600U E   vr n900 VR N900U   Administrator Type  Windows or Active Directory user or Active Director User  Password  Nil  Add Basic     You can create a dedicated user account for the surveillance system through  User    authentication of the user name and password        a       Applications       Main Menu List  continued     Image Server Setting  continued        Item       Preset Values    Description        User Administration  continued        User Setup     continued        Add Windows  User       Do not select this option  For details  consult your system administrator        Note      When the host name in the OS settings is changed  enter  Administrator  in  Enter  the object names to select  on the  Serect Users or Groups  screen  and click the   Advanced     button  Next  click the 
116. ass through the network equipment  such as a switching hub   the Auto Detect of the camera may not function properly        The  IP Information  list contains information on the IP address of  the automatically detected camera  MAC address  number of video  CH  manufacturer  and model     NR N900U             Enable O Disable CH MAKER NAME  ODelete IP Infomation AENDE  MR  IP Lease Parameter   Start Address    192 168 0 100  Unit  10Units v   25 25 25 0    192 168 0 24  Primary  192 168 0 28     Secondry  192 168 0 252 Tae  inaloginput  x s  Domain Name  ao hi    Reserve MAC Address     ON  OYes  48hours m    lient  O Only Camera O Any Client OAdd ODel      Pa 3            Click  Auto Detect     e Auto Detect starts and the camera image appears on the  screen     2 Replace the detected camera accordingly in  sequence    e You can click the Sort button to sort the order of detected  cameras       There are five types of sort buttons  including Sort by  IP    Sort by  MAC   Sort by  CH   Sort by  MAKER   and Sort  by  MODEL  buttons    e Select the detected cameras  followed by clicking the  Up   or  Down  button to change the order of the cameras      Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not  using     3 Configure the analog input  VR N900U     e For specifying the number of channels and format of the  analog input to be used     Note        f the signals of the analog camera connected to the rear panel   VIDEO IN1 to 4  terminal are different from those in the   
117. ating that  operation is enabled     E Switching Operation Off  1  When operation is OFF  Set the  OPE ON OFF   terminal to make for at least 1 s    e The  OPERATE  indicator starts blinking      The screen display disappears and the  OPERATE   indicator goes off  indicating that operation has been  turned off     Note    e Do not turn off the power until operation has been turned off              Login    If  Auto Logon  is set to    off     the  Login  screen appears after  operation has been turned on   Default setting     on        VR N1600U          Logon  Screen    Memo        e You can specify the  on   off  setting of  Auto Logon  in  Unit  Setting  of the main menu   c  Page 69        1 Enter the password using the keypad  and press  the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button   k    e If login is successful  the wallpaper screen appears        Wallpaper Screen    e When  Live viewing Auto Start  is set to    on     the  Live   screen appears when login is successful                          We     es     Live  Screen                Memo      You can specify the setting of  Live viewing Auto Start  in  Unit  Setting  of the main menu   c  Page 69     Note    e Operation on the main unit is disabled if you do not log in   e Warning messages  t  Page 150  are not displayed when you    are not logged into the system  In this case  the  WARNING   indicator lights up              31    Basic Operation       Opening the Main Menu    The following are procedures to open the main m
118. ave been  assigned to the    N900    device by default   VR N900U     E Rear Panel Input Terminals    Rear Panel Input Name of Input Event   Event Description  Terminal Name    Event during  detection of Make  signal input    Alarm IN 1 to 8 Falling   VR N1600U E   Alarm IN 1 to 4 Falling   VR N900U     Alarm IN 1 to 8 Rising   VR N1600U E   Alarm IN 1 to 4 Rising   VR N900U     ALARM IN 1 to 8   VR N1600U E   ALARM IN 1 to 4    Even during   VR N900U     detection of Break  signal input    E Output Terminals    Rear Panel Output   Name of Output Event Output Action  Terminal Name    Set output Option Out 1 2  Outputs the Make  option ouTi 2  I a   Set output Option Out 1 2  Outputs the   low Break status       Note    e Although the duration of output for the rear panel output  terminals is indicated asO seconds  it is infinitely output    e Output events of the rear output terminals cannot be deleted      All terminal inputs are treated as alerts  but there can only be  association  sequence  between one terminal with recording  Start           Specifying a VMD Event      Select the camera for specifying the VMD event  from the  Defined events  list on the  I O Setup   screen    2 Click the  Add VMD Event Motion Detection    button    If a multi camera device is selected  such as a network encoder  IP  video server   a dialog for you to select the required camera will  appear     Note       The  Add VMD Event Motion Detection   button is disabled if  there is no VMD event a
119. avi  2  Desktop Use this to export to the desktop   Path Use this to export to a selected folder                 2 Click  Export   e Export begins     Printing Recorded Images   Operation from a  Surveillance Computer     You can print out playback images that are displayed on the screen     Note          You cannot print directly from this unit  This function is for use by  the  NVR Viewer   which is downloaded onto the surveillance  computer        1 Double click the  Print  bar on the  PLAY   screen        Print selected view item    Print              Memo          You can use the button to the right of the Print bar to display the  screen at one click        2 Click the  Print     button in the  Print  section      The  NVR Viewer Survellance Report  screen appears        NVR Viewer Surveilance Report       NVR Viewer Surveillance Report                WVC  Camera 3       Thursday  July 05  2007 6 46 33 AM       Thursday  July 05  2007 9 16 36 AM             VR N1600 4dministrator        User s Note                    3 Click the  NVR Viewer Survellance Report   button on the  Page Setup  screen to specify the  printer settings   4 Click the  Print  button to start printing    e After printing ends  click the  Close  button to close the  print window   e Comments entered in  User s Note  are also printed     51    Basic Operation       Recording Camera Images    Recording Modes       There are four different recording modes     Recording Control Mode   e Manual Recording
120. ble HTML   Select this check box to specify HTML files that  scripting contain navigation or trigger functions   Note         e Pages containing such content as ActiveX and Flash will not be  supported    e Pages containing such content as ActiveX and Flash will not be  supported    e Note that some links may involve security issues        Using Still Images  GIF JPEG files  etc    T Click  Image  under  System Overview              gt   2   JVC   Camera 2     3   AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3   3 Carousel  Hotspot   al Html Page    Efase            Screen Setup  Screen        Image     2 Drag and drop at the required position using the  mouse       The  Open  screen appears        Look in      3 My Documents  N my Music   ES  G My Pictures    My Recent  Documents    C3    Desktop    My Documents    sI    My Computer     v  File name   s    My Network Files of type        Image Files   BMP   JPEG   JPG  gt   GIF      Open  Screen    3 Select the required image file    Note    e When connected to a surveillance computer  still images that are  set on a different computer are not displayed      Still images cannot be added to this unit           Adding Matrix Content    Select this option to use the Milestone XProtect Matrix feature   For details  refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User   s  Manual available on the website of Milestone Systems  http     www milestonesys com      Memo   e  The URL address may be subject to changes           67    Applications       Main Menu 
121. button and the   SELECT  button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well  as the internal distribution server          REC STOP  Button    Press to start recording in all cameras   When the recording control  mode is turned on  recording on all cameras starts after turning off  the recording control mode    Press and hold down to stop  recording    When in the recording control mode  press and hold this button to  exit the recording control mode     Memo          Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video  signal is being input      The manual recording mode executes recording from all  cameras regardless of the settings in the  Camera Record  Setting   Recording is carried out in accordance with the frame  rate selected in  Camera Record Setting        Page 84           STOP PB   Button  Stops playback when you press this button in the playback mode        PLAY  Button    Plays back at the speed and in the direction specified by the Shuttle  Dial position       SKIP  Button   E   lt a    Press to move the item selection in the reverse direction in the  menu or settings screen  Jumps to the beginning of the previous  sequence on the selected camera when you press this button in the    playback mode  Press and hold it to jump to the first image in the  database of the selected camera    E   gt     Press to move the item selection in the forward direction in the  menu or settings screen  Jumps to the beginning of the next  sequence on the selected camer
122. cherheit  die Ihnen  ein Schutzkontaktstecker bietet  auf irgendeine Weise au  er Kraft zu setzen    Um das Ger  t w  hrend eines Gewitters oder f  r einen l  ngeren unbeaufsichtigten Zeitraum zu sch  tzen   ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose  und trennen Sie die Antenne oder das Kabelsystem ab   Dadurch vermeiden Sie Produktsch  den  die als Folge eines Blitzeinschlags oder Stromstosses auftreten  k  nnen    Sorgen Sie daf  r  dass nichts auf dem Netzkabel zu liegen kommt  Platzieren Sie das Ger  t nicht an Stellen   an denen Personen auf das Kabel treten und es besch  digen k  nnen    Beachten Sie alle Warnungen und Anleitungen  die auf dem Ger  t vermerkt sind      berlasten Sie niemals Steckdosen oder Verl  ngerungskabel  Dies kann leicht zu Stromschl  gen und Br  nden  f  hren    Stecken Sie niemals Gegenst  nde gleich welcher Art durch die Geh  use  ffnungen in das Ger  t  dabei k  nnen  Hochspannung f  hrende Teile ber  hrt und Kurzschl  sse verursacht werden  Es besteht akute Brand  und  Stromschlaggefahr  Lassen Sie niemals Fl  ssigkeiten gleich welcher Art auf oder in das Ger  t gelangen   Unter folgenden Bedingungen ziehen Sie den Netzstecker und lassen das Ger  t von einem qualifizierten  Techniker   berpr  fen und reparieren    a  Wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker besch  digt ist  auch kleinste Besch  digungen k  nnen gro  e  Auswirkungen haben    b  Falls Fl  ssigkeit auf oder in das Ger  t gelangt sein sollte    c  Wenn das Ger  t mit Regen oder
123. corder eingeklemmt wird  Wird dies nicht beachtet  kann dies zu Besch  digungen am Kabel  einem Brand oder  einem Stromschlag f  hren    E Benutzen Sie grunds  tzlich das mit dem Recorder gelieferte Netzkabel  Die Verwendung eines anderen oder  besch  digten Kabels kann zu Stromschl  gen und Br  nden f  hren    WE Stecken Sie das Netzkabel nicht w  hrend der Aufnahme  Wiedergabe oder w  hrend eines Zugriffs auf das  Laufwerk aus     Hinterer Geh  usedeckel  Achtung   S  mtliche Audio   Video  und LAN Verbinder d  rfen nicht direkt an ein Kabelverteilungssystem  Au  enbereiche oder zwischen  Geb  uden  angeschlossen werden     Hintere E A Terminals  Hinweis  Verwenden Sie dieses Terminal nicht f  r eine Sicherungserdung     Einbau des VR N1600E VR N900U in einem EIA Rack mit Montageklammern    1 Montieren Sie die seitliche Klammer mit M4 Schrauben an der rechten und linken Seite  Diese Schrauben sind im  Lieferumfang des VR N1600E VR N900U enthalten    2 Entfernen Sie 4 Schrauben und 4 F    e vom Boden des VR N1600E VR N900U    3 Befestigen Sie diese mit M5 Schrauben am Rack  Diese Schrauben sind im Lieferumfang des VR N1600E VR N900U enthalten     Achtung      Stellen Sie keinerlei Gegenst  nde auf den VR N1600E VR N900U   wenn dieser in einem Rack montiert ist   Dies kann durch Ungleichgewicht zum Herunterfallen des Recorders f  hren und Verletzungen oder Sch  den verursachen    e Werden zwei oder mehrere Recorder in dem Rack eingebaut  achten Sie darauf  dass der Abstand mi
124. cular output port    To do this  specify the output port from which output is to be  triggered when a specific event or manual event occurs       Select  VO Control  from the  Camera Record  Setting  screen    e A setting dialog box appears        1 0 Control       Available Events Attach Outputs  Selected Outputs          A  Global     NVR  fea Event01   Set output Option Dutt F     Set output Option Out  h     amp  Faling signal on inpu   amp  Falling signal on inpu     Falling signal on inpu     Falling signal on inpu     Faling signal on inpu      Set output Option Qut2 F     Set output Option Qut2 I     amp  Falling signal on inpu     Faling signal on inpu     Falling signal on inpu   amp  Rising signal on inpul  i  Risinn sinnal an innl   lt   gt     Event Information        VO Control  Screen    2 Select the event to specify from the list on the  left    3 Select the output to specify  and click the  _     button located below  Selected Outputs     e To delete an output from the  Selected Outputs  list  select  the output and click the  _    button        Camera Output Settings    You can assign external outputs specified on the  I O Setup  screen   to a camera  such as sounding of a siren or switching on of lights       The assigned outputs can be triggered automatically when  motion is detected  or manually by pressing the output buttons    e You can display the  Output Settings  screen by clicking the   Outputs     button on the  Camera Recording Administator   scre
125. d      There are cases when there is no recorded image on motion  detection or on the specified date time among the multiple  cameras within the view  In this case  the last image in the  camera   s database prior to the specified point in time is  displayed in the view   Recorded images are saved to the  database        The Master Time area also displays the currently selected  playback speed     Note      The Master Time area may display a recording date time bevond  that of the latest recorded image  In this case  click the  p gt   button to move to the latest recorded image  and click the   gt    button  E   e When    Skip gaps during playback    in the  Time Navigation   section is ticked  playback may stop when it exceeds the end of  the recorded portion during simultaneous recording and  playback  In this case  deselect the tick in  Skip gaps during  playback   If playback stops  click the Play button again              43    Basic Operation       Playing Back Recorded  Images via Mouse Control   continued     Searching Recorded Image Using the  Timeline Browser    You can search recorded images using the Timeline Browser to the  right of the  Browse  screen    The vertically extended timeline shows the recording status and the  number of cameras that can be displayed in the NVR Viewer  Drag  the timeline up or down with the mouse while checking the time  display pointer     Note          The timeline is an approximate value  Therefore  the display may  not coincide wi
126. d     Specifying Generic Events    What is a generic event    This is a function that uses TCP or UDP protocol communication as  an input event for this unit    When character strings in the communication data received by the  unit matches the predetermined conditions  the corresponding  generic event is triggered  To define a generic event  you need to  configure the incoming data settings at this unit as well as the  outgoing data settings at the camera  or network device to be  used     The procedures for configuring the incoming data settings at this  unit are described below     1 Click the  Generic Events     button on the   Camera Recording Administator  screen       2  Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager  F  BR AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5   oH  BR AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2   FR we  192 168 0 20     sA WR  127 0 0 1         LE  Generic  Events     Button              Camera Recording Administator  Screen       Generic Events    Defined events     A  Generic              Generic Events  Screen       Item Description       Add new event      For adding new events        Edit selected    For editing the event selected in the  Defined    events  list        Remove selected   For deleting the event selected in the   Defined events  list                 100    2 Select Generic and click  Add new event           General Event settings  Event Name     Votification settings    Send Email if this event occurs  Event Protocol    TCP E   Event rule type   Search x  J  Even
127. d by an alarm   D  WARNING OUT  warning output terminal    Outputs a signal when an error such as operation abnormality  occurs on the hard disk     D  REC TALLY  recording status output terminal   Outputs the recording status of this unit     40   OPTION OUT1  OPTION OUT2  OPT OUT output  terminals 1 2   Outputs a signal when an event is detected       COMMON  signal ground terminal   Same as          SIGNAL GND  signal ground terminal    This is a common ground terminal  Connect it to the signal ground  terminal on the connected device     This can be used when there are insufficient common ground  terminals     Memo   e Do not use this terminal for protective earthing           15    Getting Started       Part Names and Functions   VR N900U     Front Panel                       NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER vif No00    REN    fiw  ON                                                                              i     OPERATE  Button Indicator Note    pula operation on or off  Press the button to turn operation  re port cover supplied with this product if this port  indicator bins while fe ee ann soma   This product may malfunction due to the presence of static  O  REC CONTROL  Button Indicator electricity  Remove any static before starting operation   DIES nem ee 0 moon OUTICANCEI Raton  Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press the  REC Selects ZOOM OUT     Page 35  when PTZ mode is selected and  CONTROEL Pune rr eb incseome tinesto Gispiay ne DENN an en Main Menu window  Al
128. d in a built in installation such as a bookcase unless proper  ventilation is provided    This appliance should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label  If you  are not sure of the type of power supplied to your home  consult your dealer or local power company  For  appliance designed to operate from battery power  refer to the operating instructions          This appliance system is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug  a plug having a third  grounding pin      This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet  This is a safety feature  If you are unable to insert the  plug into the outlet  contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet  Do not defeat the safety purpose of  the grounding plug       For added protection for this product during a lightning storm  or when it is left unattended and unused for long    periods of time  unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system  This will prevent  damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges       Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord  Do not locate this appliance where the cord will be abused by    persons walking on it       Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the appliance     Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in fire or electric shock     Never push objects of any kind into this appliance through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage    points or short 
129. d press the  REC  CONTROL  button at the same time to display the menu        Memo      The main menu cannot be displayed in the recording control  mode or during recording      The recording control mode performs recording in accordance  with the settings in the  Camera Record Setting  menu    c  Page 53            SELECT  Button Indicator    Use the    key to set to the camera selection mode  The indicator  lights up when the camera selection mode is set to on   es Page 36         PTZ PRESET  Button Indicator    Switches between the PTZ mode and PRESET mode of the   key   The mode changes each time the button is pressed  The indicator  lights up when PTZ mode is selected and blinks when PRESET  mode is selected        SERIAL  Terminal    For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse   sold separately   flash memory  sold separately  or UPS  sold  separately      Memo   e Use the  SERIAL1 to 4  port on the rear panel for additional hard  disk drive connection   c  Page 14     Note     e Attach the serial port cover supplied with this product if this port  is not in use      This product may malfunction due to the presence of static  electricity  Remove any static before starting operation              12             exer z      Status indicators     WARNING  Indicator    Lights up when an error occurs   t  Page 151   Press and hold the  ALARM CLEAR  button to turn off the light     E  ALARM  Indicator    Lights up when an alarm is activated   Goes off when th
130. dd New Event   screen           Add New Event    J    Send e mail if this event occurs           Add New Event  Screen                                  Item Description    External For specifying a name for the particular  event name input event   Memo     The following characters cannot be  used as part of the event name    lt   gt   amp  48217  8220     1      Send e mail   Select this check box to send an e mail  if this event   alert when the input event occurs   occurs     Include Select this check box to attach the  image from currently recorded images to the e mail  camera when the input event is triggered  Select a  camera from the list next to the check box   Note          The  Add new event     button is disabled if there is no event  available for the network camera      The  Add New Event  screen may vary according to the type of  event to be added       f the  SKIP  and              buttons are disabled while you are  modifying the settings  use the software keyboard  r  Page 28   or the mouse           Input Output Terminal on Rear Panel      The audio input acts as a network device in the VR N1600U E  system  and the device name assigned to it is    NVR     The input   output terminals on the rear panel have been assigned to the     NVR    device by default   VR N1600U E      In VR N900U  analog input circuitry is considered as a network  encoder  IP video server   and the device name assigned to it is     N900     The input output terminals on the rear panel h
131. ding Mode nee oS    Sch  duler Setting   ners iiyn wa weiss 53  Character Input and Mouse Pointer       unmerneeneeneernrnn nennen 28 ae      Entering Characters Using a Mouse      nunnerserneernernennerneen nn 28    peerying a SRAME a eS Aapa 7  f   Settings  niedi nadine elaine 56  Pentel ling Meuse caine Tomine ron  Farel Setting Picture Quality oo    eee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeaeee 58   Without Connecting a Mouse  Sold Separately          28  Changing Monitor Resolution esseere 29 Specifying Audio Recording Settings    mm 39  Precautions when Changing Settings               u een 29 Renaming Cameras and Assigning Camera Numbers      60  SCIOCN SOUP    tities taal eat el T  60  Basic Operation Screen Display  Groups and Views     s    60  Switching the Power On Off     aneeeenenenenenenenenenenenennnnnennnen nn 30 Creating Groups and views E NA E tes   agony 61  Switching Operation On Off          eernsensersnnnnnennennnnnnnennnnn 30 Adding Cameras to a VIEW ee os  LOGIN area E E EE E EE Aneel 31 Adjusting Camera Settings ae 63  Opening the Main Menu      nnersessernernennnennennnnnnnnnn nennen nenne 32 Using Your Views On  Different COMpPUtETS See pr  NVI WS EEE aster bratty dace 33 Adang a hanes oF  Viewing Live Images via Front Panel Control                         34 Adding Hot Spots  Enlarged Imag68  ee 66  Displaying the  Live  Screen una 34 Using the  Html Page              erernernenernner nennen nennen nennen 67  Select a view       unennnsenennnnnnnnnnnennnnn
132. e  ALARM CLEAR  button is pressed     Wi  HDD  Indicator   Lights up when the built in hard disk drive is accessed   E  LOCK  Indicator   Lights up when operation is locked       Page 22       FUNCTION  Button    Press the  FUNCTION  together with another button to use the  corresponding features    Special Key Operations   t  Page 134         SEARCH  Button    Displays the date and time search screen when in the playback  mode       Page 40         KEY  Button    When  KEY  button is pressed while pressing  FUNCTION  button   key operation on front panel will be disabled   Key locked mode   To disable  perform same procedure again    Press to display or hide the    software keyboard              Memo     e Use the software keyboard to input characters      Page 28           ALARM CLEAR  Button    Clears the  ALARM  display when an event occurs or motion is  detected  Press and hold this button to turn off the  WARNING   indicator        REC STOP  Button    Press to start recording in all cameras   When the recording control  mode is turned on  recording on all cameras starts after turning off  the recording control mode    Press and hold down to stop  recording    When in the recording control mode  press and hold this button to  exit the recording control mode        Memo          The manual recording mode executes recording from all cameras  regardless of the settings in the  Camera Record Setting   Recording  is carried out in accordance with the frame rate selected in  C
133. e  the internal distribution server of this unit will also be   rebooted    e Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press the   LIVE BROWSE  button at the same time   VR N1600U E    e Press the  FUNCTION    ALARM CLEAR   and  SELECT   buttons at the same time   VR N900U      LIVE BROWSE  Button                                                              SELECT  Button  FUNCTION   ALARM CLEAR  Button  Button     The image and sound may not properly synchronize during  playback on the NVR Viewer    e After you have completed the e mail setting  perform a test to  verify that it can be sent successfully   rs Page 107      When an external hard disk is connected  it may take several  minutes to start up    e Do not start the NVR Viewer during recording on VR N1600U E  at a frame rate that exceeds 160 ips  Doing so may cause the  recording frame rate to drop        33    Basic Operation       Viewing Live Images via  Front Panel Control    This section describes the procedures for viewing live images by   using the front panel of this unit    Memo    e To operate by connecting a mouse  sold separately   refer to   Viewing Live Images via Mouse Control   ee Page 36             LIVE BROWSE  Button   SELECT  Button    VR N1600U E                                       E  9 00 NO      FUNCTION     Button   15 ZOOM IN  Button   14 ZOOM OUT  Button   PTZ PRESET  Button   REC CONTROL  Button                             ALARM CLEAR  Button     LIVE BROWSE  Button     SELECT  Button  K
134. e  used as part of the event name    lt   gt   amp  48217  8220     2 1                Test Output Click this to perform a test on the output    settings                 98     Advanced  Screen    The  Advanced  screen enables you to specify network settings for  handling events     1 Click the  Advanced     button on the  I O Setup   screen      The  Advanced  screen appears        1 0 Setup  Defined events     AXIS 207W    AXIS 212 PTZ     JVC VN C20       NVR       Add new event             Add new output event        Add VMD Event  Motion Detection   f i Click              I O Setup  Screen          Advanced        Network Settings           Ftp Server Port    21      u       Alert Port     SMTP Port           Polling Frequency  1 10 sec    10  4    Advanced  Screen  2 Specify the following items   Item Description        D Ftp Server   For specifying the port number to use for   Port sending event information from the device to  the surveillance system via FTP   Specify a  number between 1 to 65535            Alert Port   For specifying the port number to use for  handling warnings related to events  including  generic events   Specify a number between 1       to 65535       SMTP For specifying the port number to use for  Port sending event information from the device to    the surveillance system via SMTP   Specify a  number between 1 to 65535                        Item Description           Polling For some devices  the surveillance system  Frequenc   may need to chec
135. e case of NVR  you can specify NAS as a drive for archiving  data     Memo        e For details on the settings of this unit when using NAS  refer to   Archiving       Page 108  and  HDD Utility   c  Page 116       Follow the NAS  Instruction Manual  for settings on NAS  This  may take a while depending on the format and RAID settings   For further details  please contact the NAS manufacturer        153    Others       Special Key Operations    Combining a Button with the  FUNCTION    Button   E  FUNCTION     REC CONTROL    Displays the main menu      Page 32  Opening the Main Menu     E  FUNCTION     LIVE BROWSE  VR N1600U E    FUNCTION     ALARM CLEAR     SELECT  VR   N900U    Reboots the NVR Viewer internal distribution server    c  Page 33    E  FUNCTION     KEY   Locks Unlocks the panel operation      sPage 22  Operation Lock     E  FUNCTION     1    Displays Hides the performance meter    ezPage 27  Performance Meter     E  FUNCTION     2   Displays Hides the clock    Page 27  Clock Display     E  FUNCTION     3   Enables Disables UPS       Page 132  Connecting a UPS     E  FUNCTION     4    For use when writing data to a CD R    Page 47  Burning a CD DVD     E  FUNCTION     5    For controlling the PTZ camera    e Page 135  PTZ Camera Control    E  FUNCTION     6     Displays the maintenance information screen    esPage 137  Display and Saving of Maintenance  Information      E  FUNCTION     7  VR N1600U E     For sending audio sound to a camera that supports  bidirect
136. e it is in progress  press the  Stop   button    When password authentication ofthe camera  receiving the audio file fails  the indicator of  the receiving camera lights up in red  When  connection with the camera receiving the  audio file fails  the indicator of the receiving  camera lights up in yellow  Playback time is  displayed in the  Recording file neme    field  when playback is in progress    As the audio playback is transmitted through  the network  the playback time displayed is  only a reference time  This may slightly differ  from the actual playback time            9 Recording   Stop        Enables you to mix and record audio sound  input to the  AUDIO IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  terminal  of this unit by entering the file name in   Recording file neme    and pressing the   Recording  button   Maximum duration  180  seconds    During recording  the  Recording  button  switches to a  Stop  button  To stop recording  while it is in progress  press the  Stop  button   Recording time is displayed in the  Recording  file neme    field when recording is in  progress                 Recording  file neme          For entering the file name when you perform  recording using the microphone connected to  this unit  The  Recording  Stop   button   is  enabled once you have entered a file name           129    Applications       Event Audio Settings  VR   N1600U E   continued     Setting Copy    This feature copies the settings of event audio associated with an  event  audio file name 
137. eck Button     po     AVI Filename  20070705 080123  avi     Z Close On Completion Ea    11    Close    11 Click  Export   e Export begins to prepare for writing data to the CD DVD     12 When export is complete  connect the CD DVD  drive to this unit    13 Press and hold the  FUNCTION  key in front   and press  4  on the keypad    e The Burn CD DVD screen appears                                         Check Box Data List  r  gt   Camera Name Start Time End Time Size  DB  JVC  Camera 3 7 5 2007 6 46 33 AM 7 5 2007 6 47 34 AM 1860 MB  7  AVI  JVC   Camera 3 7 5 2007 80123 AM 7 5 2007 80224 AM 741 MB  Select All Unsel Al EraseSelData       Total Selected Vol 26 02 MB Bun  Free Media Space 1702 82 MB   Erase CD RW     End         Burn CD DVD Screen     Erase RW  Button     Erase Sel Data  Button  Burn  Button    14 Insert the media  CD R RW or DVD R RW  that  you want to write data to into the CD DVD drive      The space available in the media is shown in  Free Media  Space    e The  Burn  button is enabled  operable      15 Select the check boxes for the AVI JPG DB  files that you want to write to the CD from the  data list       The total volume of the selected data will appear in  Total  Selected Vol     e To select all the files  click the  Select All  button    e To deselect all the files  click the  Unsel All  button     16 Press the  Burn  button    e A  YES  or  NO  message asking you whether to start  writing appears  Select    YES           Do you start burning select
138. ecording        Center panel    Do not remove the cover    D Keypad buttons Indicator   0  to  16     Login screen  e For entry of passwords  numeric characters     1  to  10 0      0    is  input when the  10 0  button is pressed      Setting screens on the main menu  e PTZ mode Keypad  For selecting a menu item    2      10 0          Camera selection keypad mode  For entering numeric characters    1  to  10 0      0    is input when  the  10 0  button is pressed      Live image display and recorded image playback screens     Camera selection keypad mode  For selecting a camera number  Upon selecting  the indicator  corresponding to the selected camera input lights up        PTZ keypad mode  live image display screen only   Moves the camera in the direction indicated by the arrow    1   W   2 4   3 a  5 4  7      9     10 0 4   11       6 HOME  moves the camera to the home position      Preset keypad mode  live image display screen only   For selecting the preset position    1  to  9   10 to 19 can be  selected when  10 0    is pressed at first      During search for recorded images  For narrowing down the search using a date  month  week  or time     1    to  10 0        0    is input when the  10 0     button is pressed      During display of software keyboard  e Selection keypad mode  For entering numeric characters    1     to  10 0        0    is input  when the  10 0     button is pressed       PTZ keypad mode  live image display screen only   Moves the mouse pointer 
139. ect Central Settings    I  Enable Milestone Xrrotect Cer  ralcarnectiors    Settings        Lilsgmst                                      General Settings  Screen    Note              e Do not use the  Enable Protection   Chenge Password      function in the  Administrator Settings                                       Item Description   D Milestone   Settings for using Milestone XProtect Central   XProtect by Milestone Systems    Central Memo    Settings e For details  refer to the Milestone  XProtect Smart Client User   s Manual  available on the website of Milestone  Systems  http   www milestonesys com     e The URL address may be subject to  changes        Patrolling   Specify the settings in this section when you   Settings are using PTZ cameras for the patrolling   feature   t  Page 93      Joystick For specifying settings related to the joystick        Page 140    Memo      There may be cases where settings  cannot be specified on this screen  For  details on other methods of setting  refer  to  Customizing Joystick Settings     c  Page 140      E Mail For specifying the e mail settings    settings  es Page 107              106                               Item Description   5  Advanced   Don t send e    Select this check box to stop sending e mail   mail on alerts if a camera is no longer in the online   camera mode    failures   Start cameras   You are able to view live images from   on remote live   cameras even when they are in the offline   requests mode   The c
140. ected camera  Do not assign a camera name that is used by other devices     Note     The    Camera Name    is not the name specified for the camera unit  but for identifying the camera on this unit                Camera For specifying the camera number   Number Note     e Do not assign a camera number that is used by other cameras                    88                   Camera Type    For specifying whether the camera corresponding to the selected number is  Fixed  or  Moveable    Fixed   Fixed Camera  Moveable   PTZ Camera          Device Port    This option is enabled only if    Moveable    is selected in the  Camera Type  item      For specifying which control port on the network encoder  IP video server  to use for controlling the PTZ features          Port Addr           This option is enabled only if    Moveable    is selected in the  Camera Type  item        Use this option to specify the port address of the camera  The port address is usually set to    0    or    1       If the PTZ cameras are serially connected  they are identified by their the port addresses  Refer to the camera   s   INSTRUCRTIONS  for the recommended settings            CAMERA CONTROL  Terminal at the Rear  of VR N900U  VR N900U     The analog camera acts as a network encoder  IP video server  in  the VR N900U system  and the device name assigned to it is   N900   The  CAMERA CONTROL  terminal at the rear is assigned  as    COM1    on the Camera Settings screen      t  Page 88     89    Applicatio
141. ed  IP address will be assigned to all devices           81       Applications       Main Menu List  continued     Auto Detect Setting  continued           CH  manufacturer  and model    Click  Auto Detect  to start auto detect and display the result  The  camera at the top of the list is used with priority    You can click the Sort button to sort the order of detected cameras   There are five types of sort buttons  including Sort by  IP   Sort by   MAC   Sort by  CH   Sort by  MAKER   and Sort by  MODEL   buttons    Select the detected cameras  followed by clicking the  Up  or  Down   button to change the order of the cameras    Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not using  After  doing so  click  Entry     OK   The  Autodetect Device  screen  appears  After entering the camera password  the  Camera Record  Setting  screen appears  Clicking  Close  automatically creates a  Default View  To save this view  change its name     Memo        e When multicast packets are configured such that they do not  pass through the network equipment  such as a switching hub   the Auto Detect of the camera may not function properly    e  Analog in  is the built in analog input of VR N900U  The highest  priority is given to the number of CH used during configuration    VR N900U     Note        e Deselecting the  Analog in  check box disables the  ALARM IN 1  to 4  signal input terminal at the rear of the unit   VR N900U        Item Preset Values Description e  age        IP Info
142. ed data           Memo    e  f no file has been selected from the data list  an error will occur       f the total volume of the selected data exceeds the available  memory space in the media  an error will occur           17 When writing is complete  the following  message appears        Burning completed  Do you delete written files from NVR     YES   NO          e To delete the temporary files  select    YES      e To write the same data to another CD  select    NO        49    Basic Operation       Writing Images Audio Sound  to CDs  DVDs and Other Media   Export   continued     Deleting Temporary Files  Operation on  the Unit       Select the temporary files you want to delete  from the data list     2 Click the  Erase Sel Data  button    A  YES  or  NO  message asking you whether to delete the selected  data appears  Select    YES           Do you delete selected data              Deleting Data from a CD RW  Operation on  the Unit       Insert the CD RW    e The  Erase RW  button is    enabled        2 Click the  Erase RW  button    e A  YES  or  NO  message asking whether you want to  delete data in the RW appears  Select    YES           Do you delete data of RW media              Note     e You cannot perform other operations while data is being written  to a CD DVD      Recorded images may be omitted during writing to the CD DVD   temporary recording error     e Do not display the Burn CD DVD screen during export    e Do not connect the CD DVD drive while a media is
143. efined Edit Name     AS  Undefined   81  Undefined ge  82 Undefined     B3  Undefined ee     B4  Undefined  B5  Undefined  C1  Undefined    Preset Position on Events  2 I Goto preset on event    Patraling           PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  Window    4 Select a preset position from the  Available  Preset Positions  list    5 Select an event from  Available Events     6 Click the  _      button    e Doing so copies the selected event to the list on the right   This list shows events that are assigned by the selected  preset position        Goto Preset Pi  Available Eve    gt        A Global          Memo    e To remove the association between a preset position and an  event  select the event from the list on the right and click the  _ lt _  button              Auto PTZ Patrolling    PTZ patrolling is a feature that enables automatic movement of a  PTZ camera between several preset positions     1 Display the  PTZ Preset Positions for Device  Name  window  1  Page 90                                         PTZ Preset Positions for  AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3 K   PTZ View  AS  H  gt          amp   Preset Positions   7 Use preset positions from device  Set Position  Edit Name   Test  Delete  Inder  C1  Undefined m Cad a  Preset Position on Events  I Goto preset on event Setup   Patrolling  Setup            PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  Window    2 Click the  Setup     button of  Patrolling      The  Setup PTZ Patrolling  screen appears        Setup PTZ Patrolling 
144. emdk  rper in den Recorder  Dringen metallische oder brennbare Gegenst  nde durch die  Bel  ftungsschlitze o     in den Recorder ein  kann dies einen Brand oder einen Kurzschluss verursachen     Pflege des Recorders   m Wischen Sie den Recorder mit einem weichen Tuch ab    Verwenden Sie keine Verd  nner oder Benzol  Dies k  nnte dazu f  hren  dass die Oberfl  che zersetzt oder matt wird  Im Fall von  hartn  ckigen Flecken  wischen Sie diese zun  chst mit einem neutralen und mit Wasser verd  nnten Reiniger ab  und wischen Sie die  Fl  che dann trocken     Transport des Recorders   E Trennen Sie vor dem Transport des Recorders alle Kabel ab  Schalten Sie den Recorder vor dem Transport aus  und stellen Sie sicher  dass der Netzstecker aus der Steckdose entfernt wurde  Wird dies nicht beachtet  kann dies  zu Besch  digungen am Kabel  einem Brand oder einem Stromschlag f  hren    EM Transportieren oder starten Sie die Installation des Recorders nicht  solange er noch eingeschaltet ist oder  unmittelbar nachdem er ausgeschalten wurde  ungef  hr eine Minute     E Achten Sie bei der Verpackung darauf  dass der Recorder vor St    en gesch  tzt ist    E Gehen Sie vorsichtig mit dem Recorder um  Setzen Sie ihn keinesfalls Ersch  tterungen oder St    en aus     VII       Netzkabel    E Verwenden Sie das mit dem Recorder gelieferte Netzkabel ausschlie  lich f  r dieses Ger  t    E Stellen Sie keine schweren Gegenst  nde auf das Netzkabel und vermeiden Sie  dass das Netzkabel unter dem  Re
145. eme      Copy Click the  Copy  button to copy the settings   After copy is complete  press the  Renew   button on the  Event Audio Setting  screen to  enable the copied settings       Cancel Closes the  Setting copy  screen without  executing copy                 130           co     Password   For entering the camera password  The  default password appears during the first  entry     Memo      There is no default password for cameras  manufactured by AXIS  When using AXIS  cameras  you need to specify a camera  password in advance  For details  refer to  the  Instruction Manual  of the camera                OK Authenticates the entered password  If  authentication is successful  the setting is  saved and the  Password setting  screen  closes automatically    If the password entered is incorrect  or if  access to the camera fails such as when the  camera is not connected to the network  an  error message appears and the password  setting will not be saved             Cancel Cancels password authentication on the    camera  Closes the  Password setting           screen without saving the password setting           Communication Settings    To make use of the event audio feature  you need to receive the  communication data for triggering the generic event issued by an  external device using the event audio program  and transfer it to the  alert port of this unit    You can enter the port number and alert port number  ss Page 102   for receiving communication data for triggering
146. en    Page 55      Output Settings for  JVC VN C20  Camera 1       All Outputs   On Manual Control       JVCVN C2O Set output Option Out high   gt  AXIS 207W Set output Option Out  low     AXIS 212 PTZ   gt  NVR   i     Set output Option Outt h       Set output Option Out2 F    Set output Option Out2 h    Set output Option Out low   lt     Output Information          On Motion Detected       Name   Set output Option Out  high Output  1 Duration  01 10 second s        Exit   Output Settings  Screen    E Specifying Output During Manual Control    You can specify outputs to be triggered manually using the output  button or from a list on the  Live  screen       Select an output from the  All Output  list    2 Click the _   button between the  All Output   and  On Manusl Control  lists    e Doing so copies the selected output to the  On Manusl  Control  list    e You can use the Up Down buttons at the top right corner  of the  On Manusl Control  list to move the selected output  upward downward within the  On Manus  Control  list    e To delete an output from the  On Manus  Control  list   select the output and click the     button between the  All  Output  and  On Manusl Control  lists     Output Settings for  JVC VN C20  Camera 1       All Outputs   On Manual Control       JVC VN C20 Set output Option Out  hig    AXIS 207W Set output Option Dut  low     AXIS 212 PTZ     NVR   i     Set output Option Out h      Set output Option Out2 F    Set output Option Dut2 h          On Mot
147. en nennen ner 111   Auto Detect Settings           nnersesenennennennnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnennn 113  Specifying IP Lease siiip nrar danisir 113   Language Setting   HDD  Utility     i e 2 einen   Restoring Default Settings 0    eesceeeeseeseeeeeeeteeseeeeeeaees 117   Distribution Settings  Details                reneenennenn 118   Connecting to a Computer sessies 120   Audio Transmission Application Control  VR N1600U E          126  Audio Transmission       ursersrnersnennennennen nennen rennen nennen 126   Event Audio Settings  VR N1600U E     sses 128  Audio  COPYING   ai iiieg en e eal aes 129  Setting Copy 1 2  ak aha 130  Password ernannten 130  Communication Settings            nnnernnnnnennnnennenennennennn 131    Others    Compatible Equipment      uersesserneesnennennernnnennennne nenn nennen 132  Compatible Network Cameras      132  Connecting a UPS  eamin inre eoa 132  External Hard Disk Drives        ueunnenseersernernnnennnnnnnn nennen 132  Connecting the External Hard Disk Drive    132  NAS inosine a nia dai dase esate ded 133   Special Key Operations         unuunsnsesnnnennenennennennnnennnnnennnan 134  Combining a Button with the  FUNCTION  Button             134  Pressing a Button for Two Seconds or Longer                  134   Recording Before After Occurrence of Event or Motion       135   PTZ Camera  Control       u    seen 135   Display and Saving of Maintenance Information                  137   Export Viewer en ae 138   Customizing Joystick Settings  
148. ense Terms and the contract is governed by Japanese law and the sole and proper forum for the settlement of  disputes hereunder shall be the Tokyo District Court           Getting Started       VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U  hereinafter referred to as    this device     is installed with Windows  XP Embedded Runtime   hereinafter referred to as    the software      a licensed software from Microsoft Corporation  By using this device and the software  you  agree to abide by the following Microsoft Software License Terms     Microsoft Software License Terms for     Windows   XP Embedded Runtime    These license terms are an agreement between you and JVC  Please read them  They apply to the software included on this  device  The software also includes any separate media on which you received the software   The software on this device includes software licensed from Microsoft Corporation or its affiliate   The terms also apply to any Microsoft  e Updates     e Supplements   e Internet based services  and  e Support services    for this software  unless other terms accompany those items  If so  those terms apply  If you obtain updates or supplements  directly from Microsoft  then Microsoft  and not JVC  licenses those to you     As described below  using some features also operates as your consent to the transmission of certain standard  computer information for Internet based services     By using the software  you accept these terms  If you do not accept them  do not use or copy 
149. enu  which is used  for specifying various settings   Note      The input ports do not operate when the main menu is  displayed  Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the  main menu is displayed    Input ports   es Page 15   VR N1600U E    Input ports      Page 19   VR N900U            SELECT  Button   2    Button          VR N1600U E                                                        FUNCTION   REC STOP   Button Button   16 ENTER  Button  SKIP  Button     13 CANCEL   Button   REC CONTROL     Button  10 0    Button     SELECT  Button          2    Button            VR N900U                                                        3 O00 GO     SS a   FUNCTION   RECISTOP  Button  Button   ZOOM IN ENTER  Button  SKIP  Button   ZOOM OUT     CANCEL  Button     REC CONTROL   8 4  Button  Button      Press and hold the  REC STOP  button for at  least 2 seconds    e Recording stops     Memo    e When in the recording control mode  press and hold the  REC  CONTROL  button for at least 2 seconds to switch the recording  control mode off and stop recording    e For details on the recording mode  refer to  Recording Modes    c  Page 52            2 Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  REC CONTROL  button at the same  time      The main menu appears     32          e Select a menu with the  2    or  10 0 4  8    button and  press the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button to open  the selected setting screen    ik  The same operation can be done using the  SKIP  but
150. eo server  is not a camera    To display the  Camera Settings  screen  click the  Camera Settings     button on the  Edit device settings  screen        Camera Settings for JVC VN C20  P T Z Camera Selection  g       P T Z type controlled through COM1           P T Z type controlled through COM2          Camera Name   Camera Nu      Camera Type   Device Port   Port Addr   Camera 1 1 Fixed                              Camera Settings  oo     Item Description   D PTZ Camera Section  Some of the Select this check box if any of the cameras connected to the network encoder  IP video server  is a PTZ camera   connected If the PTZ features are not available on the device  the check box is disabled     cameras are Pna   Tilt Zoom cameras             P T Z type For selecting a control method that conforms with the PTZ camera from the list if the PTZ camera is controlled  controlled through   through the COM1 or COM2 port of the network encoder  IP video server    COM1 COM2 If all the PTZ cameras are not controlled through the COM1 or COM2 port  select    None         Camera List On the camera list  the camera numbers on the device are listed in sequence   For example  the top line corresponds to camera number 1  and the second line corresponds to camera number 2   and so on     To change the camera settings  select a camera number from the list  specify the required information in the following  fields  and click the  Apply  button           Camera Name   Name used to identify the sel
151. er Login screen appears                   Set Program Access and Defaults       W Windows Catalog    Windows Update       Internet  Internet Explorer    3  E mail  N Outlook Express  InstallShield Wizard    InstallShield Fizard Complete    The InstallShield Wizard has successful ly  installed NVR Viewer 1  xx  Click Finish to exit the wizard     G Bg te ce tee a ee  Oj Geta   E roe oes   u a     men  er Ai ee  SBE mann raspu Hipy     ete ree  Wy he tee te     irt  E mir  AllPrograms P  fin nvr 8  NVRViewer    2 Log Off     Turn OFF Computer                     5 Installation complete    e Installation ends and a shortcut to the    NVR Viewer    is  created on the desktop        123    Applications       Connecting to a Computer   continued     Login to NVR Viewer  Continued     2 Specify your login information in the following  fields       Connect to Server    Network Video Recorder    NVR Viewer              JHE    Connect Cancel         VR N1600U E  User name  vr n1600  Password  vr n1600      VR N900U  User name   vr n900  Password  vr n900       Item Description         Server  address    For specifying the IP address and port  number of this unit   For example  in the case  of  http   192 168 1 253 80     80  is the port  number     The port number is the number as specified  in  Server Configuration  under  Image  Server Setting        Page 77           Authentication   For selecting one of the three types of  authentication   Select    Basic authentication           W
152. er s e mail address    Settings outgoing  SMTP  mail server name and  login settings    4 Subject text   For specifying the mail title    5  Message text   For specifying the message text    6  Time For specifying the time interval  minutes   btw mail min   for sending each e mail alert   utes    T  Include Select this check box to include images in  Image the message    Memo     e You can send a test e mail by clicking the  Test  button  If the e   mail address of the sender is not registered with the mail server  of the recipient  the  The mail address of the sender is not valid       message may appear  When this occurs  double check the  sender s e mail address and outgoing mail server  and re enter  the e mail address    e E mail messages are sent in the following cases       When an input event occurs       Page 96  Specifying an Input Event    e When the event button is clicked       Page 99  Configuring Event Buttons      When a generic event occurs      Page 100  Specifying Generic Events    e When motion is detected      Page 104  Specifying Motion Detection     e When camera failure occurs    When an archiving error occurs    e Page 108  Archiving      e In order to send an e mail via Motion Detection  you need to  specify the timing for sending out e mails in  Scheduler Setting    c  Page 53     e After you have completed the e mail setting  perform a test to  verify that it can be sent successfully        107    Applications       Archiving    With the archiving 
153. er software or  hardware that pools connections  You may use unlimited inbound connections at any time via TCP IP     3 Scope of License     The software is licensed  not sold  This agreement only gives you some rights to use the software  JVC and Microsoft reserve  all other rights  Unless applicable law gives you more rights despite this limitation  you may use the software only as expressly  permitted in this agreement  In doing so  you must comply with any technical limitations in the software that allow you to use it  only in certain ways  For more information  see the software documentation or contact JVC  Except and only to the extent  permitted by applicable law despite these limitations  you may not     e Work around any technical limitations in the software      Reverse engineer  decompile or disassemble the software    e Make more copies of the software than specified in this agreement   e Publish the software for others to copy    e Rent  lease or lend the software  or   e Use the software for commercial software hosting services     Except as expressly provided in this agreement  rights to access the software on this device do not give you any right to  implement Microsoft patents or other Microsoft intellectual property in software or devices that access this device     You may use remote access technologies in the software such as Remote Desktop to access the software remotely from  another device  You are responsible for obtaining any licenses required for use
154. era2    x VN E4 Audio1    Disable  NVR Audio1    VN E4  Camera1             Item Description         Enabled Enables Disables the audio source     Memo     Right click on the camera or audio source  in the  Device Manager  section to select                 Disable  or  Edit       Device Displays the name of the audio source  You  name can overwrite the existing name with a new  one      Target Enables you to specify the camera database    Database  to record audio sound to              59    Basic Operation       Recording Camera Images   continued     Renaming Cameras and Assigning Camera  Numbers      Select a camera name and right click on it  followed  by clicking  Edit       The Camera Name and Number editing screen appears        2 Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager          SQ AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5      BR we  192 168 0 20     BR IVC VN C625  192 168 0 49   BAO  Camera al   a Audio 1  Di pee Disable    58 NR  127 0 0 1    FP Audio 1  Disabled   Archive Setup        Audo 2  Disabled  Settings      Add Device                     1O Setup          Matrix     Event Buttons           Generic Events       1O Control                               Camera Name and Number R           Camera Name         1   Camera Number    3  2           Item Description        D Camera Name Displays the name of the camera  You can  overwrite the existing name with a new    one           Camera Number   Enables you to specify the camera  number                 Note          Do no
155. ered to    Unplug this appliance system from the wall outlet before cleaning  Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol  cleaners  Use a damp cloth for cleaning    Do not use attachments not recommended by the appliance manufacturer as they may cause hazards    Do not use this appliance near water   for example  near a bathtub  washbowl  kitchen sink  or laundry tub  in a  wet basement  or near a swimming pool  etc    Do not place this appliance on an unstable cart  stand  or table  The appliance may PORTABLE CART WARNING  fall  causing serious injury to a child or adult  and serious damage to the appliance   symbol provided by  RETAC   Use only with a cart or stand recommended by the manufacturer  or sold with the appliance   Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer   s instructions  and should use   a mounting kit approved by the manufacturer  e  An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care  Quick stops  excessive  force  and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn   Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation  and nv   to insure reliable operation of the appliance and to protect it from overheating  these Selene   openings must not be blocked or covered  The openings should never be blocked by placing the appliance on  a bed  sofa  rug  or other similar surface  This appliance should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat  register  This appliance should not be place
156. ers      When there is variation in the supply voltage such as  during lightning  operation of this unit may be disabled to  protect the system until the supply voltage stabilizes  again      Eliminate static electricity before performing work that  requires you to touch the input output terminals  such as  when installing devices       Do not touch the rear panel of this unit when it is running  as static electricity may cause it to malfunction       When there is a large number of data recorded on this  unit  such as short alarm records  a longer time may be  required during search or backup  This is not a  malfunction       Data recorded from TV broadcasts or video  audio   recordings shall only be restricted to personal uses  and  their use without the prior consent of the copyright holder  is strictly prohibited under the copyright law       The width of the border lines  black in color  of images on  the split screen varies according to the type of input  signals  This is due to the characteristics of the camera   s  input signals  and is not a malfunction  The condition may  also be improved by adjusting this unit  For details  consult  our authorized dealers or JVC service centers       This unit comes with a high precision hard disk device  Be  careful not to exert vibration or impact on this unit when  handling it      Exertion of vibration or impact particularly when the power  is on or when the hard disk is being accessed may cause  this unit to break down       W
157. erstellers  Zus  tzlich  sollten Sie einen vom Hersteller zugelassenen Montagesatz verwenden  Eine Kombination aus Ger  t und  Wagen sollte grunds  tzlich mit gro  er Sorgfalt bewegt werden  Schnelle Stopps    berm    iger Krafteinsatz und  unebener Untergrund k  nnen zum Umkippen der Ger  t Wagen Kombination f  hren    Schlitze und   ffnungen im Geh  use sowie an R  ckwand und Unterseite dienen der Bel  ftung des Ger  tes  und sorgen daf  r  dass das Ger  t zuverl  ssig arbeiten und sich nicht   berhitzen kann  Daher d  rfen Sie diese    ffnungen auf keinen Fall blockieren oder abdecken  Die   ffnungen k  nnen beispielsweise blockiert werden   wenn Sie das Ger  t auf ein Bett  ein Sofa  einen Teppich oder einen   hnlichen Untergrund stellen  Dies darf  auf keinen Fall geschehen  Das Ger  t sollte niemals in der N  he oder   ber Heizger  ten oder anderen  Ger  ten  die W  rme abstrahlen  aufgestellt werden  Geschlossene Aufstellungsorte wie B  cherregale eignen  sich nur dann zur Aufstellung des Ger  tes  wenn eine ordnungsgem    e Bel  ftung jederzeit gew  hrleistet ist   Das Ger  t ist mit einem Schutzkontaktstecker  einem Stecker mit Erdungsb  geln an beiden Seiten   ausgestattet  Dieser Stecker l  sst sich nur in eine geerdete Schutzkontaktsteckdose einstecken  Dies dient  Ihrer Sicherheit  Falls sich der Stecker nicht problemlos in die Steckdose einstecken lassen sollte  lassen Sie  die  veraltete  Steckdose von einem Elektriker austauschen  Versuchen Sie niemals  die Si
158. es  settings are not enabled until you have clicked  the  Update Now  button    e Changing the time setting may prevent normal playback of recordings made at  the same time as a result    e Changing the    hour    value of the hour minute second setting when operations  are in progress may prevent normal display of the live images  In this case   reboot this unit              Time Zone      VR 1600U    GMT 05 00   Eastern Time     VR 1600E     GMT  Greenwich  Mean Time    For specifying the time zone     Note      Make sure that the date and time that you specify does not overlap with any  previous recorded data       f the specified time zone is incorrect  the system may not run at the correct  time after synchronizing with the Internet time server    e When the time zone is altered  press the  LIVE BROWSE  while holding down  the  FUNCTION  button to reboot the NVR Viewer               oo     Volume Properties          Device Volume      Center position    Adjust the volume using the slider bar        LOAD configuration    Reads the preset configuration files and displays them on the screen         o1    S     SAVE changes    Exits after entries and the selected content are configured to the system   Manual update of time is disabled  To update the time manually  go to the  Day  and Time Properties  item                            CANCEL changes          Exits without saving all entries and selected settings        75       Applications       Main Menu List  continued     I
159. es of the NVR Viewer  refer to the following pages     ae   j  Log Out  Button  x  Button     Viewing Live Images via Mouse Control    gt  Page 36        Playing Back Recorded Images via Mouse Control  m       t  Page 42  vp  AL       Screen Setup       Page 60  ked i         u    E Logging Out    Click the  Log Out  button  e You are logged out and the Login screen of the NVR  Viewer appears again     Note     e  f you have restarted this unit  or the NVR Viewer on this unit  log  out from the NVR Viewer at the surveillance computer once  and  login again              E Exiting    Click the  x  button  e Exits the NVR Viewer     125    Applications       Audio Transmission  Application Control  VR   N1600U E     Audio sound input  such as from a microphone  to the  AUDIO IN 1   terminal is sent to a camera that supports bidirectional audio  and  output to the speakers connected to the camera     Preparation    E Connection      Refer to  System Connection Example    t Page 26  to connect the microphone to the  microphone amplifier or mixer  and connect the  output to  AUDIO IN 1  on the rear panel    Memo        e Audio sound input to the  AUDIO IN 2  terminal cannot be sent to  cameras that support bidirectional audio        E Registering camera that supports bidirectional  audio      Refer to  Adding Cameras       Page 86  to  register the camera that supports bidirectional  audio       Note    e If you have changed the camera password  specify the new  password in  Event 
160. escribes the procedures for viewing recorded images  using the front panel of this unit      LIVE BROWSE  Button Indicator  STOP PB   Button    Keypad Indicator       VR  NI 600U E                                              zg      Oooo oO WOO        ras     SEARCH  Button Button  TER  Button                             SKIP  Button     16 E   13 CANCEL  Button   PTZ PRESET  Button Indicator     LIVE BROWSE  Button Indicator  STOP PB   Button       Keypad Indicator  VR N900U                                                       aa 1     6 N 55 MIO  amp  5    SEARCH  Button     SKIP  Button        ZOOM IN ENTER  Button     ZOOM OUT CANCEL  Button   PTZ PRESET  Button Indicator    Displaying the  Browse  Screen      Press the  LIVE BROWSE  button when the  wallpaper or main menu screen is displayed    e The NVR Viewer starts up and the  Live  screen appears     2 When the  Live  screen appears  press the   LIVE BROWSE  button again    e Press the button to toggle between the  Live  and  Browse   screens                  Browse  Screen     Live  Screen    40    Select a view    For details on the view settings  refer to  Screen Setup    c  Page 60      1 Press the  PTZ PRESET  button so that the  PTZ   PRESET  indicator starts to blink    e The  PTZ PRESET  indicator switches between lit and  blinking each time the  PTZ PRESET  button is pressed     2 Press the  15 Zoom In   ZOOM IN ENTER  and   14 Zoom Out   ZOOM OUT CANCEL  buttons to  select a view   k    Note    e Do not s
161. ess   column for the Internet router or firewall  and the port number in the  Port  column for  access to the Internet by the surveillance computer    You have to configure an appropriate port forwarding on the router or firewall to allow  access by a surveillance computer that is connected to the Internet    For details  refer to the    Instruction Manual    of the respective devices        Outside IP  address    For specifying the global IP address when connecting to this unit via the Internet        Outside Port       For specifying the port number to use when connecting to this unit via the Internet        Local IP Ranges       Settings for using the Master Slave feature by Milestone Systems    For specifying the beginning of the IP address range in the left field on the screen   and the end of the IP address range in the right field  Click the  Add  button    You may define as many local IP address ranges as required     Memo        e You may specify only one IP address   Example  192 168 10 1 to 192 168 10 1    e For details  refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User   s Manual available  on the website of Milestone Systems  http   www milestonesys com     e The URL address may be subject to changes           Max number of  clients    For specifying the maximum number of NVR Viewer users allowed for connection at  any one time  The number of users also includes the use of the  NVR Viewer  on the   Live  and  Browse  screens of this unit  Do not set a number of l
162. etting    Unit Setting enables you to specify settings related to this unit  including account configuration  error recovery  and serial port configuration     Current Password     New Password    New Password reenter     Live Viewing    E  Live Viewing Auto Start    Error Report       Dialog          Mail       tecord Control             YION at startup    Mail Server    SMTP Server    POP Server    SMTP Authentication    Emergency Record    Time of Record    Serial    D Speed    Comment    9600    60seconds v       Mail Send List    List    Encode Mode    Data Length 8 v       Average File Size    ad    OChange             Auto Logon       OOK    ODelete    Port Number User ID Password    25    110    OSend Test Mail     V  Interpolate       Parity v Stop Bit             Item       Preset Values    Description    Reference Page        D Password    Enables you to specify the login password for this unit   Note          Specify the password using numeric characters only           Current Password    To change to a new password  enter the  Current Password         New Password    Enter a new password              New     Enter the new password again for confirmation  and click  Change  to  Password reenter  enable the password change   Auto Logon   Select check To log in automatically after turning on the power of this unit  select  box the  Auto Logon  check box   Do not select  check box  Change oa Executes the password change           Live viewing       Live viewing Auto 
163. evice  screen appears                             Note   Example of  Configure Device  Screen         It is recommended that you set the picture quality to  approximately 24 KB  VGA   Specifying a higher image quality Memo   may affect the sound and cause the frames to be dropped    The  Configure Device  screen may vary with cameras        Refer to the  Instruction Manual  of the respective cameras for  the setting items           58          Specifying Audio Recording Settings    Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main menu    The  Camera Recording Administator  screen appears     an Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager         EB axis 207w  192 168 0 5   E  ER WC  192 168 0 20       ER IVC VN C625  192 168 0 49     589 NvR  127 0 0 1    2    A  Audio 2  Disable       Scheduler     General Settings       Enable    Archive Setup    Settings       1 0 Setup       Event Buttons       Generic Events          IO Control                Memo     Memo      The audio sound is recorded in the database of the camera  image specified in the  Target Database  item  9     e Audio sound is recorded throughout the interval when the  scheduler ofthe camera specified in the  Target Database  item      is in the online mode    e In the case of VR N1600U E  audio signals that are input to   AUDIO IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  on the rear panel are allocated as   Audio1  and  Audio2  in  NVR  127 0 0 1  on the  Device  Manager       In the case of VR N900U  audio signals that are input to  
164. executed  in the frame rate specified in  Recording Settings   Desired  framerate  of the  Camera Settings  screen    Manual recording lets you start and stop recording on all cameras  by using the  REC STOP  button  Press the  REC STOP  button to  start recording  Press and hold down the  REC STOP  button to  stop recording    The  REC CONTROL  indicator lights up     E  EXT REC IN  Signal Recording Mode    Recording starts on all cameras when the  EXT REC IN  terminal of  the rear input output terminal is set to MAKE  Recording is executed  in the frame rate specified in  Recording Settings   Desired  framerate  of the  Camera Settings  screen    Recording using  EXT REC IN  signals has priority over the  recording control mode or manual recording    When recording by the  EXT REC IN  signals is complete  the  cameras return to the original recording mode     32    Memo     e When recording using signals from the  EXT REC IN  terminal   the light of the  REC CONTROL  indicator goes off  and the   REC  indicator appears blinking    e Emergency recording lets you start and stop recording on all  cameras regardless of the  Scheduler     settings or  Camera  Settings     e Pressing the  REC STOP  button cancels recording by signals  from the  EXT REC IN  terminal and switches automatically to  the    manual recording mode     The  REC  indicator also  changes from    blinking    to the    lit    mode      Pressing and holding down the  REC STOP  button cancels  recording by sig
165. eypad                    VR N900U                            r  ane                             6   3  a  6    5  a     FUNCTION   ALARM CLEAR  Button  Button     ZOOM IN ENTER  Button   ZOOM OUT CANCEL  Button   PTZ PRESET  Button   REC CONTROL  Button    Displaying the  Live  Screen      Press the  LIVE BROWSE  button when the  wallpaper  1 or main menu  2 screen is  displayed         1 Wallpaper Screen  2 Main Menu Screen    e Press the  LIVE BROWSE  button when the  Browse   screen is displayed    e Press the button to toggle between the  Live  and  Browse   screens     34              Browse  Screen     Live  Screen    Select a view    For details on the view settings  refer to  Screen Setup    t  Page 60      1 Press the  PTZ PRESET  button to switch the   PTZ PRESET  indicator to the blinking mode    e Press the  PTZ PRESET  button to switch the  PTZ   PRESET  indicator between the lit and blinking modes     2 Press the  15 ZOOM IN  ZOOM IN ENTER  and   14 ZOOM OUT  ZOOM OUT CANCEL  buttons  to select a view   k    Note    e Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval      When live images do not appear on VN C625U VN C655U  set  the password for connecting VN C625U VN C655U on the  camera unit as well as this unit again  For details on the setting  procedures  refer to the  INSTRUCRTIONS  of the camera in  use and procedures for setting the root password on the  Edit  device settings  screen in this manual      Page 87     e The audio setting is res
166. feature  you can store recorded images up to the  maximum available capacity of the hard disk    By default  recorded images received from cameras are stored in  the database for each camera  and data is automatically archived  when the database is full     E Setting Items and Buttons          Item Description   D Enable This function is not available   Archiving The check box is selected at all times           Delet databases  in the backup  directory older  then     days    For specifying the number of days you  want to store archived images           Memo    e To adjust the database settings for each camera  click  Camera  Record Setting   Device Manager     Camera Name   and  select  Datebase Settings   You can store up to 600 000 frames  or 40 GB of data  Ifthe maximum capacity is exceeded  data is  deleted starting from the oldest information  By archiving on a  daily basis  you can store image data up to the maximum  available capacity of the hard disk    e You can specify the number of times to create archives in a day      The archiving location for each camera is automatically selected   The drive with a large amount of free space is selected    e You can use the playback features for archived images in the  same way as normal recorded images        Automatic  delete old  archives if  space is needed    This function is not available  The check  box is selected at all times          Send email on  archive error    Sends out an e mail alert when  archiving fails     
167. field   The parenthesis is used to process the  expressions as a single entity  In other words   the content inside the parenthesis is  processed first        Adds     to the  Event message include  field        AND    Adds the operator    AND    to the  Event  message include  field  Use the    AND     operator when you want to specify that the  expressions on both sides of    AND    must be  present        OR    Adds the operator    OR    to the  Event  message include  field  Use the OR operator  when you want to specify that either one of  the expressions on the two sides of OR must  be present        Delete          For deleting the item to the left of the cursor  in the  Event message include  field           Memo        e To specify the timer settings for a generic event  select the event  added in Step 2  and click the  Add new event     button        101    Applications       Camera Input Output Port  and Events  continued     Event Notification Settings  When a specific event occurs  this can be indicated using yellow    color in the title bar area at the top of the live image display screen     The yellow indicator lights up when the specified event has  occurred  the red indicator lights up when motion has been  detected  and the green indicator lights up when images are  received from a camera       Select the camera to configure from the  Camera  Recording Administator  screen  and select   Settings        e A setting dialog box appears     2 Click the  Event No
168. g Images Audio  Sound to CDs  DVDs and Other Media  Export     This has no impact on audio recording              Recording Settings       Desired  framerate              none     Enables you to specify the recording frame rate  You need to specify a value that is larger than  the  Frame Rate  of the  Speedup Settings  item  D  Specify the frame rates such that the total  rate of all cameras displayed in the view of the  Live  screen does not exceed 80 ips  image  per second  for VR N1600U E and 60 ips for VR N900U   Note     See below for the recordable frame rate of each model  Set the total frame rate of all  cameras so that it does not exceed the respective values  When speedup settings are  used  restore the frame rate of the speedup settings to the original value   e VR N1600U E  160 ips or below  When using NAS  80 ips or below   e VR N900U A   B  120 ips or below  When using NAS  60 ips or below   Analog input of VR N900U A   B   60 ips or below  Analog input of VR N900U  20 ips or below    Recording frame rate may fall below the preset frame rate depending on the signal  processing condition of this unit   e Recording frame rate may deteriorate under the following conditions   e During export  e When changing the picture quality of the displayed image  e When the total frame rate of the displayed images  including display on PC  exceeds 80  ips for VR N1600U E and 60 ips for VR N900U  e When the frame rate is set to a high value  the recording frame rate may be sligh
169. ge Windows  Firewall settings  See Also    i  Network  SEE        Note    e Do not use the same IP address in the same network  environment    e Do not register multiple IP addresses with one NIC when  specifying the computer network settings        127    Applications       Connecting to a Computer   continued     Install the NVR Viewer on the computer  Note           e Before installing  check to ensure that Microsoft  NET  Framework 2 0  DirectX 9 0 or later versions  and Microsoft  Internet Explorer 6 0 or later versions are already installed on  the computer  If any ofthese are not installed  installation of the  NVR Viewer may fail        1 Open the Internet Explorer browser  6 0 or later  versions   and enter the IP address of NVR as     http   192 168 1 253       e A welcome page will appear     A Cannot find server   Microsoft Internet Explorer  Eile Edt yew Favorites Tools Help    OQ     MAG Preah remis B R      Address      http   192 168 1 253      Welcome to Milestone Systems    XProtect  Remote Client  amp  Smart Client    d install NVR Viewsr locally    Remote Client    D Internet    Note         e Do not select  Remote Client         2 Click  Download and install NVR Viewer locally       The  Do you want to run or save this files   confirmation  message appears     File Download   Security Warning    Do you want to run or save this file     MA Name  YR N900_Viewer exe       potentially harm your computer  If you do not trust the source  do not    6     While f
170. gital zoom on images from any  camera displayed in the view  When digital zoom is enabled  you will  see a small overview frame at the bottom right corner              PTZ Navigation Button    Presets  IPIX PTZ Positions     I  Digital Zoom           Digital Zoom        2 ea        Live  Screen    Memo          The recorded images will not be recorded in zoom even when  digital zoom is used    e When digital zoom is used  the recording frame rate may  decrease due to an increase in the load factor of this unit    e To exit the digital zoom function  deselect the  Digital Zoom   check box     Note        e When  Digital Zoom  is ticked  the actual PTZ operation will not  be performed        38    Using Preset Positions    You can select a position from the preset list to change the camera  orientation to this preset position   rsPage 92  Defining a Preset  Position      Memo     The buttons are only available if the camera is a PTZ camera            Presets  List                              Click the  v  button on the  Presets  list in the   PTZ Control  section      The preset list appears on the screen     2 Select a preset position from the preset list    The camera moves to the preset position     Memo    e You can configure the preset list by going to Main Menu     Camera Record Setting    Settings     PTZ Preset  Positions         Page 90           Other Useful Functions  H Listening to Audio Sound    To listen to live audio sound  select the required audio source from 
171. guage Support and XML Encoding    Local IP Ranges       User Setup       User Access        0 For infinite    seconds      seconds              Language   western  European   iso 8859 1              3 Select the user for which user right is to be  specified from the  User  list              Define User Rights       User  3  Global User Rights     View Live I Edit Shared Views  Browse Edit Private Views 4  VW Setup  User Rights for Camera    Defined Cameras  Viewable by selected user    AXIS 207  Camera 8          IVC VN C20 1  Camera 7  UVC VN C625  Camera 5  INEA amarat    V  VN E4 Camera2 6     VN E4 Camera3        W Live IV Browse    W PTZ I7 AVI Export  IV PTZ Preset Positions IV JPG Export  IV Outputs IV Database Export 7  W Events VW Sequences  fa IV Smart Search  E    Close    4 Select the user   s global rights  not restricted by  cameras  in the  Global User Rights  list                   Item Description  View Live Enables you to view live images   Browse Enables you to play back recorded images   Setup Enables you to use the Screen Setup tab   Edit Shared Enables you to create and edit views within    Views the shared group              Edit Private Views   Enables you to create and edit private views           5 Select the camera to allow access from the   Defined Cameras     6 Click  _   to move to  Viewable by selected  user     7 Select the functions for each of the cameras that  have been moved to  Viewable by selected user     e Select the functions from the 
172. hat can be used by the network  cameras           Defined events          AXIS 207w a    AXIS 212 PTZ      gt  JVC YN C20    lt  NVA  t output Option Dutt high     Set output Option Outl low     Set output Option Dut2 high   a Set output Option Out2 low    ans      OK       VO Setup  Screen                      Detection  the  Defined events  list  Only one VMD  event can be defined for each camera   Note   e To avoid the risk of generating an  excessive number of VMD events  a  new VMD event cannot occur within  five seconds after the occurrence of  the last VMD event   e VMD events cannot be sent by e mail       Advanced    Displays the  Advanced     screen    n  Page 98   6  Remove For deleting the event selected in the  selected  Defined events  list      Edit For editing the event selected in the  selected     Defined events  list   Note           The available events differ among network cameras    e When an event is defined using the  I O Setup  screen  this  automatically overwrites the alarm settings at the camera  If a  generic event is already in use  when the alarm settings at the  camera are configured manually   the generic event or the event  audio that makes use of the generic event  t  Page 128  will be  disabled  However  the generic event settings at the recorder  unit remain unchanged   VR N1600U E        95    Applications       Camera Input Output Port  and Events  continued     O Settings  continued   E Specifying an Input Event      Select the camera f
173. he  camera unit as well as this unit again  For details on the setting  procedures  refer to the  INSTRUCRTIONS  of the camera in  use and procedures for setting the root password on the  Edit  device settings  screen in this manual      Page 87     e The audio setting is restored to    No Audio Sources    when you  return from the setting screen to  Live   Set the audio parameters  again        Searching Recorded Image Using  Time   Navigation    You can search recorded images using  Browse  on the  Time   Navigation  screen as follows      Double click the  Time Navigation  bar on the   Browse  screen    2 Select the search date time from the box    e Specify the date in the left box and the time in the right  box     3 Click the  Go To  button      The view in the image display screen jumps to the  specified date and time      The specified date and time will appear in the Master  Time area        Master Time Area    on    1 00x    Tuesday  July 24  2007    11 21 33 343 AM    Iaa   14    lt  ue    gt     gt  gt        4 i  Back Time Forth     4 p   Playback  Slow 19             Skip gaps during playback  712412007    11 21 33 aM  gt     GoTo  Go To  Button                          Time Navigation  Section    Memo     The Master Time area displays the recording date and time of  the selected playback images  The master time is the time to  which all the cameras are linked  and when you specify a time    all the recorded images you see in  Views  will be accurately  displaye
174. he device from which audio  signals are to be recorded        AUDIO OUT  audio output terminal  RCA     Outputs live sound in the live viewing mode   Outputs recorded sound in the playback mode     Memo          There is no audio output when playing back still images  when  running searches other than x1  or when playing back frame by   frame         28   VIDEO IN1 to 4  camera video signal input terminals  1to4    Connect to the video output terminal of the analog camera  sold  separately          VGA OUT  VGA output terminal  Outputs live images  recorded images and the menu screens         SERIAL1 to 4  serial terminals 1 to 4    For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse   sold separately   flash memory  sold separately   UPS  sold  separately  or additional disk drive  sold separately      18      Connector cover    Memo          Do not remove the cover        D  LAN1  LAN1 connection terminal  camera network     For connecting to the IP camera  sold separately  network using a  LAN cable                       Color Status  Left Off Not connected to the network or  Indicator connected to a 10Mbit Sec  network   Green On Connected to a 100Mbit Sec  network   Orange   On Connected to a 1Gbit Sec  network   Right Orange   Off Not communicating   Indicator Blinking   Communicating                        33   LAN2  LAN2 connection terminal  Intranet   For connecting to the remote PC network using a LAN cable                    Color Status  Left Green Off N
175. he procedures for viewing live images by    controlling the mouse     Displaying the  Live  Screen    Select  Live  from the main menu    e The NVR Viewer starts up and the  Live  screen appears     e When the  Browse  or  Screen Setup  screen of the NVR  Viewer is displayed  click the  Live  tab     To exit the NVR Viewer  click the  x   button      Live  Tab   Views  Section    View List  x  Button                 Live  Screen      If you have specified the camera record settings without closing  the  Live  screen  live images may not appear immediately after  you have exited the camera settings    In this case     Unable to connect to the server  Reconnecting to  the server    or    Unable to connect to 127 0 0 1 80 on the device  name camera name   Reconnecting to the server    will appear  on the  Live  screen   127 0 0 1 80 is the internal IP address of  this unit that is currently in operation         Memo      Depending on the condition of the network circuit  it may take  some time before images from the camera are displayed      Depending on the connection of the additional hard disk  several  minutes may be required for the  Live  screen to appear        36    Select a view    For details on the view settings  refer to  Screen Setup    c  Page 60        Select a view from the  Views  section  or from  the view list at the upper end of the window    Note     e Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval      When live images do not appear on VN C6
176. he time zone in  OS Setting  is altered  press the  LIVE   BROWSE  while holding down the  FUNCTION  button to  reboot the NVR Viewer              Displaying the  Browse  Screen    Select  Live  from the main menu  e The NVR Viewer starts up and the  Live  screen appears     2 Double click the  Browse  tab on the NVR  Viewer     e Similarly  click the  Browse  tab when the  Screen Setup   screen of the NVR Viewer is displayed      Browse  Tab       IPISETZF                                 E Digtal Zoom        Browse  Screen    42     x  Button     Views  Section           Tucsdas  uy 24  2007  11 21 33 343 AM    iaa  la  Gan  Cm   ei   ri                      Mr ja  Sequence  Section  Browse  Screen   Alerts  Section   Time Navigation  Section   Audio  Section    Smart Search  Section     Export  Section       u  Playback  ia        Skip gaps during playback  qa   zusam     er   7                   E  Ea    e  t may take a few minutes before the  Browse  screen is  displayed    e If you have specified the camera recording settings  without closing the  Browse  screen  the playback images  may not appear immediately after you have exited the  camera settings    In this case     Unable to connect to the server   Reconnecting to the server    or    Unable to connect to  127 0 0 1 80 on the device name camera name    Reconnecting to the server    will appear on the  Browse   screen   127 0 0 1 80 is the IP address of the this unit that  is currently in operation     e  f playback
177. hen moving this unit  do so about 1 minute after  disconnecting the power supply       Do not turn off the power switch at the rear of this unit or  unplug the power cord during recording or playback  or  when the hard disk is being accessed  Otherwise  it may  break down     Precautions During Master Slave   Connection of Milestone XProtect   Enterprise  XPE  and this Unit     Connect only one master PC to this slave unit   Connecting multiple master computers to this slave unit  may cause it to malfunction     Software Installation     Do not install any software to this device other than the  provided application software  Otherwise  operations may  become unstable  Any malfunctions arised in such a case  will not be covered under warranty     11    Getting Started       Part Names and Functions   VR N1600U E     Front             RETWORE VIDED neconBenve  To  soo  2  3 4 00                                                     XL                                                             9      CISTOP STOP      0  OO                   SE gg          OPERATE  Button Indicator    Switches operation on or off  Press the button to turn operation     ON    and hold down the button to turn operation    OFF     The  indicator blinks while the recorder is starting up or shutting down        REC CONTROL  Button Indicator    Switches the recording control mode on or off  The indicator lights  up when the recording control mode is set to on    Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  an
178. ialog     Master Time Area                        1 ME    a    Start Time    7 52007     s4ao02amM  l   se         End Time     7  5 2007       8 40 02 AM    sa      KR    N         JVC   Camera 3 z   Browse  Screen               __AVI   JPEG Export        Database Export  J        Export  Section    Memo      e Export preparation may take some time depending on how the  external hard disk drive is connected           47    Basic Operation       Writing Images Audio Sound  to CDs  DVDs and Other Media   Export   continued     Burning a CD DVD  continued     5 Select the export format if you have selected   AVI JPEG Export        e Select either  AVI   movie clip  or  JPEG   still image    e Select whether to add time stamps to the exported  images     6 Select the required frame rate if you have  selected the  AVI  format    e Select either the  Full  option  which sends all images to  the AVI file  or the  Half  option  which reduces the size of  the AVI file by sending images on a per second basis   though images will still be played back in real time      7 If you have selected the  AVI  format  select  AVI  Codec  from the  AVI Codec  list and enter the  file name      The default file name is    yyyymmdd hhmmss avi           iE NVR Viewer AVI   JPEG Export    Export Status   Start Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 01 23 AM  End Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 02 24 AM  Source   NVR Camera 3    Export Type    Export Format   Add Timestamp  5  Yes    Framerate     Full    Ha
179. ick  Browser exe  in the list on the right  side of the Explorer      The Export Viewer starts up     138         20070709055744_20070709055749_CurrentView    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help         Back   P Search Folders    Address     E  Exported Images 20070709055744_20070709055749_CurrentVview  Folders X Name      Desktop a 127 0 0 1_80    AXIS 207W  Camera 2        My Documents   127 0 0 1_80    AXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 1  3 9 My computer    127 0 0 1_80    IVC   Camera 3  E Se SPLO125_  1_00 C   Olpix     e Local Disk  D      Audio      Removable Disk  E            Exported Images       20070709085744_200707090 3    C 20070709055744_200707090     Browserl dll       127 0 0 1_80    Ax15207    lCommon dl       127 0 0 1_80  axis 212 v _  ijl1Sfix dl   lt  a  amp   Description  Milestone XProtect Viewer Company  Milestone Systems A S f 2 38 MB a  My Computer       Warum z   Boom     1 9 2007    6 06 AM                    Milestone XProtect Viewer  Screen    Viewing Exported Data    E Viewing Data on a Specific Date Time Using  Date Time Selection      Click the  V  button for date selection  e A calendar appears        Juy  2007  gt     Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat    1234567  8      10 11 12 13 14  15 16 17 18 19 20 21  22 23 24 25 26 27 28  23 30 3   Z gt  Today  7 9 2007    Calendar    2 Selecta specific date from the calendar  e Image on the selected date appears     3 Click the  V  button for time selection  and  select a specific time    e Image of the selected time 
180. iles from the Internet can be useful  this file type can  tun or save this software  What s the risk     Internet Explorer   Security Warning    Do you want to run this software     ci Name    R N NVR Viewer Installer  Publisher  Mil        More options Run    While files from the Internet can be useful  this file type can potentially harm  your computer  Only run software from publishers you trust  What   s the risk     122    3 Click the  Run  button  Doing so starts up the NVR Viewer Setup Wizard     WinZip Self Extractor   NVR_Viewer  1  exe    eq  Installing Please wait     ae          i     4 Click  Next  and follow the installation  instructions                 InstallShield Wizard    Welcome to the InstallShield Fizard for  NVR Viewer 1  OF    The InstallShieldR Wizard will install NVR  Viewer 1 0f on your computer  To continue   click Next           InstallShield Wizard    License Agreement    Please read the following license agreement  carefully     Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement        This license agreement is a legally binding agreement between you   either an individual or a single entity  and Milestone for the  XProtect Smart Client component of the Milestone XProtect Enterprise  software product  which may include associated software parts  media   printed materials  and online or electronic documentation    Protect Smart Client component will be referred to as  fhe software  component   in the fol lowing     By installing  copying  
181. in  Live Settings     re Page 56  on the  Camera Settings  screen                    Maintain   If this check box is selected  images will not be    Image stretched to fit the size of the display position   Aspect Images will be displayed in the aspect ratio  Ration  horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen  that             they have been recorded        Note       The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the  picture quality  The  Image  settings may affect the recording  performance  As such  use this function with the value fixed at     Full         When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during  playback  the frame rate setting is    disabled      Searching  Recorded Image Using the Timeline Browser   rs Page 44    a F Memo    4 Select the preset carousel position and specify e The green border indicates that the position is used for the  its properties in the  Properties  section carousel feature      The sequence in which cameras appear in the carousel is  automatically determined by camera and device names  The  cameras appear recurrently in alphabetical order                                     Begin by selecting the cameras to include in the carousel   You can also select all cameras on a server at once by  selecting the check box next to the  Server  icon        65    Basic Operation       Screen Setup  continued     Adding Hot Spots  Enlarged Images     The selected camera within the view is displayed in the hot spot  designated position
182. in the direction indicated by the arrow    1    2      3 4   5   7     gt    9 2    10 0 4   11      6  HOME  moves  the mouse pointer to the center of the screen       13 CANCEL     Setting screens on the main menu  Cancels the selection      14 ZOOM OUT     Live image display and recorded image playback screens     PTZ keypad mode  live image display screen only   Zooms out      Preset keypad mode  For selecting the next view       Press the  14 ZOOM OUT  button while holding down the   FUNCTION  button to change the resolution of VGA output      15 ZOOM IN     Live image display and recorded image playback screens     PTZ keypad mode  live image display screen only   Zooms in      Preset keypad mode  For selecting the previous view     e Press the  15 ZOOM IN  button while holding down the  FUNCTION   button to change the resolution of VGA output      16 ENTER      Setting screens on the main menu  Confirms the selection      During display of software keyboard  To perform the mouse click operation         LIVE BROWSE  Button Indicator    Switches between the  Live  mode and  Browse  mode    The indicator lights up when in the  Live  mode    Pressing the  LIVE BROWSE  button when the wallpaper screen is  displayed shows the  Live  screen    Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press and hold the  LIVE   BROWSE  button at the same time to log out of the system    Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press the  LIVE BROWSE   button at the same time to reboot the NV
183. inal  and   Multi Mode     Generic Event  that has been  configured on the  Camera Record Setting   screen   External Alarm Terminal  on the rear  panel of the VR N1600U E unit  as well as   Multi Mode  are displayed     Memo        e After setting an event for the external  alarm terminal of VR N1600U E  do not  delete the     NVR  127 0 0 1     audio input  of the main unit in  Camera Record  Setting   Doing so clears the settings              Push To  Talk       Push to Talk is a feature that enables  transmission of audio sound to a camera that  supports bidirectional audio when the  microphone button is pressed down  when  Make signal is input to the  ALARM IN   terminal of this unit        Page 20    To use this feature  select the external alarm  terminal on the rear panel of the VR   N1600U E unit    Leave this blank if you are not using the   Push To Talk  feature    The action that is associated with the   ALARM IN 1 to 8  terminals configured on  the  Camera Record Setting  screen are  disabled when the  Push To Talk  feature is in  use   Only alarm input of the selected  terminal is disabled  Actions of terminals that  are not selected remain valid      Input Output Terminal on Rear Panel     t  Page 97                         Conditional   The conditional expression of the  Generic  expression   Event  selected in the  Event  item   is  displayed      Renew Updates the current settings of the event  audio feature  and closes the  Event Audio  Setting  screen     
184. indicated in gray  17     EM  Load factor of 60   or less  lights up in green  471   iz     WE Load factor of 90   or less  lights up in green  71N and yellow  Ss Ios     I Load factor exceeds 90    lights up in green   be  4   S__ yellow and red  Memo       The performance meter automatically appears after this unit  starts up    e To hide the performance meter  press the 1   keypad button  while holding down the  FUNCTION  button    e To move the display position of the performance meter  left click  and drag it to the desired position    Note       Do not use the recorder when the performance meter is  indicated in red           2R     Preparation       Character Input and Mouse  Pointer    You can input characters and move the mouse pointers in two  different ways      Operate using the buttons on the front panel    e Operate by connecting a mouse  sold separately      Memo    e Connecting a mouse eases the specification of complex settings  as well as input of characters    e Connection to a keyboard is not recommended           VR N1600U E                                                              16 ENTER  Button   KEY  Button                                                        ZOOM IN ENTER   Button     KEY  Button    28       Entering Characters Using a Mouse    You can use the software keyboard to input characters when you  are using mouse       Press the  KEY  button on the front panel    e The software keyboard appears   e Press the  KEY  button again to hide
185. indows Windows authentication  Login as the current  authentication Windows user    current user        Windows Windows authentication   authentication   You can login as a Windows user  but a user  name and password will be required        Basic Basic authentication   authentication   A user name and password will be required  to login to this unit               User name For entering the Windows user name if you  have selected    Windows authentication    for  the  Authentication  item     For entering the  user name registered in the  User  Administration  item under  Image Server  Setting  rs Page 118  if you have selected     Basic authentication                 Password For entering the login password for this unit if  you have selected    Windows authentication     for the  Authentication  item     For entering  the password registered in the  User  Administration  item under  Image Server  Setting      Page 118  if you have selected     Basic authentication                 124       Item Description        5  Remember   Saves the password    password If you have selected    Windows  authentication    or    Basic authentication    for  the  Authentication  item    selecting this  check box enables you to login the next time  simply by clicking the  Connect  button           Auto login Enables you to login automatically  Select  this check box to enable you to login to  NVR    Viewer  automatically                 3 Click the  Connect  button    The NVR Viewer screen ap
186. ing in the mode selected before the power failure after  recovery      In the recording control mode  recording by a motion or event  does not resume unless another motion or event occurs after  recovery from the power failure      The recording control mode returns to the status before the  power failure     Note       The recorded images may not be played back properly if they  are not archived  c  Page 108  before the power failure      It is recommended that an uninterruptible power supply  UPS   be used to protect the hard disk from damage in the event of a  power failure   c  Page 132       f a power failure occurs while formatting a hard disk or  archiving  subsequent operations may be affected even when a  UPS is connected              Selecting the Recording Control Mode    In order to record in the recording control mode  you need to  specify the scheduler settings    Page 53   image recording  settings      Page 55   and picture quality settings       Page 58  in the main menu  Camera Record Setting        Press and hold down the  REC CONTROL   button while camera recording is stopped    REC  indicator is off      e The  REC CONTROL  indicator lights up and the unit  switches to the recording control mode      Recording will be executed according to the camera  record settings     Memo    e To stop recording  press and hold down the  REC STOP  button  during recording in a mode other than recording control  the   REC  indicator lights up or appears blinking   After
187. ion       Switching the Power On   Off    Switching the Power On    Connect the power cable    e Connect using the power cable supplied to an AC100V   50 Hz 60 Hz  outlet     2 Turn    ON    the power switch at the rear panel     e A system check will run when the power is turned on    e The  OPERATE  indicator starts blinking    e After blinking  the  OPERATE  indicator lights up to  indicate that operation has been turned on    e When the setting is complete  recording starts  automatically in the record control mode   When the    ON  at startup    checkbox of  Record Control  under  Unit  Setting  of the main menu is selected      Note          Do not disconnect the power cord nor turn the power switch     OFF    while the system check is running or in the OPERATE  ON mode  Otherwise  it may break down     Memo           f the device does not start up even after the power switch on the  rear panel is turned    ON     press the  OPERATE  button on the  front panel        Switching the Power Off      Press and hold the  OPERATE  button for  about2 seconds to turn off the power    e After blinking  the  OPERATE  indicator goes off   2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel    Note          The recorded images may not be played back properly if they  are not archived  rs Page 110  before the power failure      It is recommended that an uninterruptible power supply  UPS   be used to protect the hard disk from damage in the event of a  power failure   c  Page 132    e Be su
188. ion Detected          Set output Option Dut  low   lt     Output Information    Name   Set output Option Out high Output  1 Duration  0 1710 second s        Exit   Output Settings  Screen       E Specifying Output via Motion Detection    You can specify outputs to be triggered automatically when motion  is detected       Select an output from the  All Output  list    2 Click the _   button between the  All Output   and  On Motion Detected  lists    e Doing so copies the selected output to the  On Motion  Detected  list    e To delete an output from the  On Motion Detected  list   select the output and click the Bal button between the  All  Output  and  On Motion Detected  lists     Output Settings for  JVC VN C20  Camera 1       All Outputs   On Manual Control       JVC YN C20 Set output Option Out  high    AXIS 207W Set output Option Out low     AXIS 212 PTZ     NVR z   i     Set output Option Out h       Set output Option Out2 F    Set output Option Dut2 h          On Motion Detected       Set output Option Outt low   lt     Output Information    Name   Set output Option Out  high Output  1 Duration  01 10 second s     Exit   Output Settings  Screen    103    Applications       Motion Settings    Note     E Setting Buttons and Check Boxes                e Before configuring the motion detection settings  it is  recommended that you complete the settings related to image  resolution  compression  and motion detection exclusion areas   Otherwise  you may need to adjust the se
189. ional audio       sPage 126  Audio Transmission Application Control   VR N1600U E       134    Pressing a Button for Two Seconds or  Longer  E  REC CONTROL    Turns on off the recording control mode     Selecting the Recording Control Mode   ss Page 53   E  ALARM CLEAR    The light of the  WARNING  indicator goes off     Page 151  Actions when Warning Indicator Lights Up    E  FUNCTION     LIVE BROWSE    Logs out of the system     Memo    e When  Auto Logon  is enabled  the login operation starts  automatically immediately after logging out   rsPage 69  Unit  Setting            E  FUNCTION     OPERATE   Shuts down the system forcibly        Recording Before After  Occurrence of Event or  Motion    You can record images before and after the occurrence of an event    or motion when recording in the recording control mode   t  Page 53          Motion or event    Stopped          S Records for set time before Y    Stopped         Records for set time after   y      Go to  Settings      gt  Page 56   and select     Conditionally    in  Recording Settings    When  to store images in database              2 Select    On motion    or    On event       3 Specify the number of seconds in     seconds  pre post recordings on motion event     e Images are recorded during the specified time interval  before and after an alarm or motion is detected     Recording Settings  Desired framerate            frame s  per  Second    0 13 Second s  btw  mages  I Enable speedup          F J  r    When
190. ions  and  configure each of them as a separate NAS drive      Changing the  Automatic path selection  settings may cause  playback of data prior to the change to fail           Archive setup    F Daily archiving times  Time to add   Delete databases in the backup directory older than    9999 days 12 00 00 14 27 16 H    add      Delete    Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply     Name at     taxis zowie  records   E tax  szizerzjc  recordin    Dvemczic recordings                    Precautions when Changing NAS Archive  Settings  When NAS is specified as the archive destination  the path that is    displayed on the    Select Directory    screen may not coincide with the  preset value                 Select Directory              Directory   c  program fles ive vr n900    we                Gare  ange      Artaud_Ipn  AP Laud Spanish    OO APldhep_Eng          far    etapa        Archive Setup  Screen   h  is specified as the archive  destination      Select Directory  Screen   C drive is displayed     Precautions when Changing Archive  Settings    Do not specify the C  L  or M drive as the archive destination  Doing  so may cause the system to malfunction     109    Applications       Database Settings    This section enables you to specify the database settings   Select a camera from  Main Menu   Camera Record Setting     Device Manager   and select     Settings         Memo              e Recorded image data is referred to as the database in this    ma
191. is registered with multiple units  of VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U  recording may not be  properly completed in some cases  Camera control  e g  PTZ  control  may also become unstable  It is recommended that a  single VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U be used for  registering one IP camera as well as for controlling PTZ  operations    e Do not connect a broken hub  router or deteriorated network  cable etc  Doing so may prevent the system from operating  properly    e Connection to a keyboard is not recommended        Clock Display    This unit comes with a clock display feature   You can display the current time on the screen       Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  2    keypad button at the same time      The clock is displayed at the top left corner of the screen  beside the performance meter     Memo    e To turn the clock display off  press the  2    keypad button while  holding down the  FUNCTION  button    e To move the clock display position  left click and drag the clock  display to the desired position           Performance Meter    This unit comes with a performance meter  which allows you to  check its load on the meter    At high operating loads  the system may not be able to record at the  preset frame rate or operate normally       Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  1 x   keypad button at the same time    e The performance meter appears on the screen     Green Yellow Red                             E Load factor of 5   or less  
192. is unit switches the output of the output terminals to break        20          Camera Control Terminal  VR N900U     Use connection cables according to the table below  Also make    sure that you read through the instruction manual of the equipment    to be connected        Signal Pin No        RX        RX        TX        TX        GND       NC       NC       NC             OO  CO  NN  DD  oO  AJ wo  Pp        NC           D sub 9 pin  male     Differences when  operating VR N1600U E  and VR N900U    The name of control buttons and operating methods may vary  between VR N1600U E and VR N900U  Such circumstances will  be indicated using the rules below     E When name of control button is different     D Indicated accordingly using  button name of VR   N1600U E  and  button name of VR N900U          k mark is inserted at the end of the sentence             I l  Press the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER button  3     E When operating method is different    The operation for the respective model is stated  and the model  name is indicated at the end of the sentence     Mounting to a Rack    Use the supplied rack mount bracket to mount this unit to the EIA  rack  For the installation to the rack  consult the specialist or dealer     1 Mount the rack mount bracket using screw  1       Use the 4 screws  M4 x 10 mm  supplied to fasten this unit  at the two sides     2 Remove the foot screws    4 pcs  at the bottom  of the unit      Remove the foot   3 Mount to the rack using screws     
193. k  encoder  IP video server            Note    e To import preset PTZ positions from a device  the  preset PTZ positions of this unit first has to be deleted   Note that by doing this you will lose all information on  the preset PTZ positions in this unit     Memo      In order to use preset positions from the camera or  network encoder  IP video server  on  the names of the  preset positions must contain only alphanumeric  characters  space is not allowed   Preset positions with  names that contain blank characters cannot be                                        imported    Set Position Registers the position specified in  PTZ  View  as the preset position selected in the  list    Edit Name    For editing the preset position name  selected in the list    Test For testing a defined preset position  Select  the preset position from the list  and click  the  Test  button  The result is displayed  immediately in  PTZ View     Delete For deleting the preset position selected in  the list    AV For moving a preset position selected in the  list upward or downward       Preset For specifying settings to move the PTZ  Position on   camera to a preset position when an event  Events occurs      Patrolling For configuring PTZ patrolling     Page 93  Auto PTZ Patrolling                  Note       The configurable items may differ according to the camera in  use           91    Applications       Defining a Preset PTZ  Position  continued     Defining a Preset Position    1 Display the
194. k the status of their input  y 1 10sec    ports in order to detect whether input has been   received  These regular status checks are   called    polling       The  Polling Frequency 1 10sec   field enables   you to specify the interval between status   checks  Specify the interval in units of 1 10   seconds     Memo        e For I O devices  it is highly recommended  that the polling frequency be shortened as  much as possible       Refer to the    Instruction Manual    of the I O  device for devices that require polling                    Note        e Do not alter these settings unless under special circumstances   Altering the setting unnecessarily may cause the system to  malfunction  They need not be altered under normal  circumstances     Precautions during alteration    e When using event audio  the  Transfer port  of  Event Audio  Setting   Communication setting  must coincide with the  Alert  Port  number     Page 131      It is also necessary to set the  Alert Port  to a different number  from the  Event receive port  of  Event Audio Setting       Communication setting    rs Page 131        Configuring Event Buttons    Event buttons are used to manually trigger events from the  Live  Viewing  screen     1 Click the  Event Buttons     button on the   Camera Recording Administator  screen       23 Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager    HR AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5        H  R AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2   H BR WC  192 168 0 20     589 WR  127 0 0 1     1O Set
195. le Select this check box   archiving to   Data will not be archived to the built in HDD    internal HDD   if this check box is not selected               6 Quick Selecting the  Quick Format  check box   Format followed by clicking the  Initialize  button  enables you to shorten the time required for   the initialization process    If bad sectors are found during the HDD  initialization process  deselect the  Quick  Format  check box and press the  Initialize   button                 Memo        e NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network   For this unit  you can specify the NAS as a drive for archiving  data    e For details on archiving to the NAS drive  refer to  Archiving    c  Page 108      Note        e Specify the user name with a different name from the  OS  Setting       Page 72  host name under the user setting for NAS  connection    e After configuring the NAS drive  an error message will appear on  the NVR Viewer for several minutes  and live images may not be  displayed during this interval        Restoring Default Settings    Follow the procedures below to restore the default settings       Select  Return to default setting  from the main  menu      The  After initializing the system is automatically rebooted   Reboot now   message appears     2 Click  OK       Reboots the unit after initializing     Main Menu      Unit Setting     OS Setting     Flash Memory Utility  e    e ing      Return to default settings  Select      Live Viewing    Au
196. lect  Set  from  Mode       The mouse pointer turns into a    pencil       e Moving the mouse pointer to the day of week band in the  calendar section enables you to zoom in zoom out on the  calendar  To check the detailed schedule  enlarge the day  of week area of the calendar           Cony Sched me   __ComardPatatoal         Tuesday Wedresday Truscay Friday Saturday                5 Select the  Online  check box    6 Specify the date to switch online in the calendar  section  e Hold down the mouse in the calendar section  and move    the mouse pointer to specify the date     The selected period is indicated in light blue color     al    me    en   eee             day Fiday Saturday          Statt event  Stop event  Patol scheme                          54       Memo    e Selecting the  E mail    Patrolling   and  Enable speedup  check  boxes enables you to specify the following settings        Enables you to specify a constant speedup  period regardless of any conditions when  speedup in  Settings     is set to    Enable      t  Page 56       D Enable  speedup       Enables you to specify the period to send out  the e mail alert when e mail alert notification  during a motion is selected  rs Page 96        E mail          Audio You cannot select this check box        Patrolling       Enables you to specify the patrol scheme and  patrolling period  Select a patrol scheme from  the  Patrol scheme  list  and specify the   corresponding period in the calendar section    Patrol
197. lected                                Use the  7    5  gt   button to display the list of cameras  Jk       25 Camera Recording Administrator    jager    Service Manager     Scheduler       General Settings    Archive Setup     YO Setup     Event Buttons                       5 Camera Recording Administrator          Device Manager   HM AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5    RE AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2        ig wc  192 168 0 20     toga  General Settings         Service Manager  Add Device            1 0 Setup        zu         YO Control                Use the  SKIP  button to select  Settings      followed by  pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button   ik  eThe  Camera Settings  screen appears     Speedup Settings    for  JYC YN C6A I             I  0 13Secord s btw mages             Recording  Settings          2  0 13 second s  btw  images          ot   On vet          Cendtionally             essen    Database Settings          In case of detabase failure the Folbwing action should be taken   Archive  no repair     clude Regiors Settngs          Moten cor   Ese Repon Besen Ci                                     Live Settings      Set the display rate for live images   eSet the display rate for live images to    Same as  recording    or    Same sa speedup    under  Live  Settings     eWhen    Same sa speedup    is selected  the  Frame  Rate  specified under  Speedup Settings  is used as  the display rate for live images    eWhen    Same as recording    is selected  the  Frame  
198. lf        Digital Zoom Export     Yes No    ANI Codec  Microsoft Video 1 her 7    Export Destination     CD    O USB    AVI Filename  20070705 080123 avi           Y  Close On Completion Export   Close    Note          Make sure that the total number of characters used for the  device and camera names does not exceed 61    e If recording fails  the recorder may not be able to read the  existing data correctly      New data cannot be added to existing data on a DVD media     8 it you have selected  Database Export      setting  of the following items will be enabled        iE NVR Viewer Database Export           Export Statu                 Start Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 01 23 AM    Thursday  July 05  2007 8 02 24 AM       End Time               Source s   UVC   Camera 3     F  Include Audio     F  Comoress Exnorted Database  2     Er    3     Password                       Repeat Password     Export Destir  cD  Ouse    ia  Include Viewer Progam Fies 9  Export Cose         vation                     Close On Completion          Item Description    Include Audio       Tick this box if you wish to include  audio sound in the image to export    You cannot select this check box if the  audio source does not contain any  data               Compress Select this check box to compress the  Exported exported database   Database      Encrypt Select this check box to encrypt the  Exported exported database  Specify a password  Database for subsequent decryption                 9 A
199. lick   Settings           The  Camera Settings  screen appears   e Specify the setting for each item      Page 56                     Camera Settings for  JVC VN C625  q    era 3  x      Speedup Settings Live Settings  Desired framerate   Desired framerate    g frame s  per  Second    0 13 Seconds  btw  images    Same as recording      Same as speedup         Recording Settings  Desired framerate            Camera Monitor Setup          e az frame s  per  Second    0 13 Seconds  btw  images                           I Enable speedup a  3   r JR  p 1 Disabled     When to store images in database    C Always F On motion p      C never PEE  ne x  4      Conditionally                    Max  records in database       Max timespan in database 10m               I7 Archive automatically when database is Full           3 seconds pre post recordings on motionfevent                In case of database failure the fo   ving action should be taken         archive  no repair  al   T    Exclude Regions Settings     Exclude Regions      Region Color         Image Qualty     Event Notifications      Outputs        amp     _ cance     Camera Settings  Screen       Motion Detection Settings    Motion Detection      Motion Color                      55    Basic Operation       Recording Camera Images   continued     Settings        Factory settings        Item    Preset Values    Description        D Speedup Settings       Frame Rate    Enables you to specify the frame rate to acquire from the c
200. list of options below  All  options are selected by default                                                           Item Description  Live Enables you to view live images from the  selected camera    PTZ Enables you to control the PTZ camera using  the NVR Viewer    PTZ Presets Enables you to move a PTZ camera to a  preset position using the NVR Viewer    Outoputs Enables you to trigger outputs such as by  switching on lights and sounding sirens  if  such outputs can be generated    Events Enables you to trigger manual events using  the NVR Viewer    Audio Enables you to listen to live audio sound from  the selected camera   Only when an audio  sound source is specified for the camera    Browse Enables you to play back recorded images  from the selected camera    AVI Export Enables you to export images in the AVI  format    JPG Export Enables you to export images in the JPEG  format    Database Enables you to export images and audio   Export sound in the database format    Sequence Enables you to use the Sequences feature to  play back images from a selected camera    Smart Search   Enables you to use the Smart Search feature      Page 46  using the NVR Viewer    Audio Enables you to listen to playback audio  sound from the selected camera   Only when  an audio sound source is specified for the  camera           8 Repeat the same procedures for other users    Memo   e It is recommended that you limit  Setup  rights to prevent any  inadvertent changes made by system users   
201. lled      3 Page 122  by logging in with your own user name and  password       Double click the  Setup  tab on the NVR Viewer     Note    e User rights may be configured to restrict access to the  Setup   tab  In this case  consult your system administrator           2 Select the folder you want to use in the  Views   section    e You can create or edit views   e Folders that cannot be edited are indicated by the  LOCK   icons     Adding a Carousel    You can use the carousel feature to display images from multiple  cameras in sequence in a single view position  Also  you can setthe  time interval for switching the camera to view       Displaying the  Screen Setup  Screen          amp  Shared  Default Group  3     Default View  Entrance   E   B Private                2     2   X     Shortcut        Cameras  Server   1   AXIS 207W  Camera 1     2   JVC   Camera 2      XIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3  a  Carousel   TEE   9 Html Page  E  Image  EE Matrix                2 Click and drag the  Carousel  icon in the   System Overview  section to the position that  you want to set in the view                                           Item Description    Image Enables you to adjust the image resolution and  Quality picture quality during viewing  Select    Full    at  all times     Frame This is the viewing frame rate   Rate Select  Unlimited   default value  same as live    settings    Medium   25   of the frame rate   or   Low   5   of the frame rate   depending on the  frame rate specified 
202. ls   Push terminal  Input x 12  Output x 5  GND x 3    E Compression Format    Video   JPEG MPEG 4  Audio   u law  64 kbps  A D 8 bits  Fs   8 kHz  E Recording    HDD Capacity   500 GB x 1    152    E Recording Displaying live images Distribution  performance  When viewing live images on NVR    Up to 160 ips 80 ips 80 ips  When not viewing live images on NVR      Up to 240 ips 0 ips 80 ips  when NVR  Viewer is not started up     When using NAS  When viewing live images on NVR  Up to 80 ips 80 ips 80 ips  When not viewing live images on NVR  Up to 80 ips O ips 80 ips    E Attachments Accessories    VR 1600U  Start up Guide              unnerneenenneennnnnn 1  CD ROM  Heer 1  Power Cord  2 M  esseere 1  Rack Mount Bracket senen 2  Warranty Card      uueesnneersennensnnnnnnnn nennen 1  Service Information Card                      1  Screw  M4 X10 mm     4  Screw  M5 X 11 mm     4   VR 1600E  Start up Guide    1  CD ROM    dite  1  Power Cord  2m  sses 2  Rack Mount Bracket           22uu ee 2  Screw  M4 X 10 mm               nn 4  Screw  M5x 11 mm     4    E Dimensional Outline Drawing  Unit  mm                                                                                                                    x The specifications and appearance of this unit may be  modified for improvement without prior notice        VR N900U    E General  Allowable Operating Temperature    5   C to 40   C  Allowable Storage Temperature     20   C to 60   C  Allowable Operating Humidity    30   
203. mage Server Setting    This section enables you to specify settings for connecting this unit to a computer  and for displaying the  Live  and  Browse  screens   The distribution settings are also applied to operation on the  Live    Browse   and  Screen Setup  screens of this unit        3 ImageServer Administrator    Server Configuration       Name    Port   Enable Outside Access     Outside IP Address     Outside Port  Local IP Ranges          Max  number of clients     User Administration    Define Username and Password  User Setup             Full access for all users       Restrict user access          Log Files     Days to log   10    Audit Log  Enable Audit Logging  T    Days to log   0 For infinite   Minimum Logging Interval   seconds   In Sequence Timespan   seconds     Language Support and XML Encoding        Language   Western  European   iso 8859 1  y       76          Item    Preset Values    Description         Server Configuration    Enables you to specify the server name  port number  and details on external access  to the server        Name      Server    For specifying the server name        Port      80    For specifying the port number to use for the server        Enable Outside IP  Address    Select check box      Do not select  check box    Select this check box to enable access to this unit from a surveillance computer  connected to the Internet via the router or firewall    If you have selected this option  specify the global IP address in the  IP addr
204. minal on the connected device     This can be used when there are insufficient common ground  terminals     Memo   e Do not use this terminal for protective earthing           19    Getting Started       Rear Panel Terminals    Rear I O Terminals                                                                                                       Terminal Remarks   ALARM IN    Name of Input Event   Name of Input Event Make Contact Input  Alarm IN 1 to 8 Falling  VR N1600U E  Alarm IN 1 to 8 Rising  VR N1600U E   Alarm IN 1 to 4 Falling  VR N900U  Alarm IN 1 to 4 Rising  VR N900U   250 ms and     gt  250 ms and  lt q        _   above iq    above  Make Break  Memo      Set the impedance at the output end to 10 KQ or lower    EMERGENCY  Make Contact Input   ALARM RESET   250 ms and  above  Memo      Set the impedance at the output end to 10 KQ or lower    EXT REC IN  Make Contact Input  250 ms and  above    Memo      Set the impedance at the output end to 10 KQ or lower    OPE ON OFF      Make Contact Input   gt  1 s and above     p Approx d  50 ms  OPE ON OPE OFF  Memo       Set the impedance at the output end to 10 KQ or lower   Aal   Name of Output Event   Name of Output Event fhe al i      i   10 mA an   WARNING OUT  Set output Option Out 1 2 high Set output Option Out 1 2 low below    OPTION OUT1  4   OPTION OUT2    gt  Make Output     External Pull up Level   The make contact is formed using the individual output terminals and the COM terminal   Turning off the power of th
205. mission    e Connection status with the camera is displayed in the   Status  area of the  Status Information  list  Press the   Connect  button and audio sound that input to  AUDIO IN  1  terminal of this unit will be transmitted to the cameras  that are displayed as    Connected       e  f    Disconnected    appears  check the network between  this unit and the camera  IP address of the camera  and  the power of the camera  If  Authentication failed  appears   repeat procedures on the  Event Audio Setting  screen to  register the password of the camera for which the   Authentication failed  message is displayed     Password       Page 130     5 Press the  Disconnect  button to disconnect the  camera    Memo        e Cameras that are not registered in  Camera Record Setting  of  the main menu cannot be selected       f the audio setting of the camera is set to the half duplex mode   you will not be able to hear audio sound from the camera when  in the    Connect    status    e If you are sending the microphone sound to a camera for which  an event audio has been set  the audio playback function that is  associated with an event will be disabled during microphone  sound transmission  and priority is given to the microphone  sound transmission    e You can also operate the  Connect  and  Disconnect  button from  the alarm terminal on the rear panel  In this case  select the  alarm terminal to be used for control with  Push To Talk  under   Event Audio Setting   An alarm input t
206. nals from the  EXT REC IN  terminal and stops  recording           E Emergency Recording Mode    Recording starts on allcameras when a MAKE signal is detected by  the  EMERGENCY  terminal of the rear input output terminal   Recording is executed in the frame rate specified in  Recording  Settings   Desired framerate  of the  Camera Settings  screen   Recording is only executed during the time specified in  Emergency  Record  of  Unit Setting  e  Page 70     Emergency recording has priority over the  recording control mode   or  manual recording  mode    When emergency recording is complete  the cameras return to the  original recording mode     Memo      The  REC CONTROL  indicator goes off and the  REC  indicator  appears blinking during emergency recording    e Emergency recording lets you start and stop recording on all  cameras regardless of the  Scheduler     settings or  Camera  Settings       Pressing the  REC STOP  button cancels emergency recording  and switches automatically to the    manual recording mode      The  REC  indicator also changes from    blinking    to the    lit     mode    e Press and hold down the  REC STOP  button to cancel all  recording modes and stop recording     Note      When in the manual recording   EXT REC IN  signal recording or  emergency recording mode  motion detection and event  recording settings are ignored              Recording Operation During Power Failure    If a power failure occurs during recording  the system resumes  record
207. nappropriate waste handling of this product  For more information about collection point and recycling of this  product  please contact your local municipal office  your household waste disposal service or the shop where  you purchased the product    Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste  in accordance with national legislation      Business users     If you wish to dispose of this product  please visit our web page www jvc europe com to obtain information  about the take back of the product      Other Countries outside the European Union     If you wish to dispose of this product  please do so in accordance with applicable national legislation or other  rules in your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic equipment           Dear Customer     This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  compatibility and electrical safety     European representatives of Victor Company of Japan     Limited is     JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  Postfach 10 05 04    61145 Friedberg  Germany       INFORMATION  FOR CANADA   RENSEIGNEMENT  POUR CANADA        This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003           Cet appareil num rique de la Class A est conforme a la norme NMB 003  du Canada                    WARNING  FOR EUROPE     This is a Class A product  In a domestic environment this product may  cause radio interference in which case the user may be required
208. ndestens die Gr    e  eines Recorders betr  gt       Bauen Sie den VR N1600E VR N900U nicht in ein Rack ein  wenn die Umgebungstemperatur 40  C oder mehr betr  gt       Achten Sie beim Einbau in einem Rack darauf  dass die Innentemperatur der Rack Einheit 40  C oder weniger betr  gt       Wenn Sie das Ger  t in einem Rack montieren  halten Sie einen Abstand von mindestens 15 cm zwischen Rack und der  R  ckwand des Ger  tes ein     Beachten Sie im Fall eines Einbaus oder Wartung dieses Ger  ts in einem Rack die speziellen Vorsichtsma  nahmen  um  sicherzustellen  dass das System nicht an Stabilit  t verliert    Folgende Richtlinien dienen zur Sicherstellung Ihrer Sicherheit    Ist dieses Ger  t die einzige Einheit  die in dem Rack einzubauen ist  so sollte es auf dem Rack Boden angebracht werden  Wird  das Rack teilweise genutzt  bauen Sie die Teile von unten nach oben ein  Die schwerste Komponente sollte stets unten im Rack  eingebaut werden  Ist das Rack mit stabilisierendem Zubeh  r ausgestattet  montieren Sie zun  chst diese Stabilisatoren  bevor  Sie das Ger  t in das Rack einbauen oder warten     Achtung     Vor dem Einbau in das Rack ist sicherzustellen  dass das Rack sicher und vor dem Umfallen gesch  tzt ist     Technische Daten     Allgemein    Zul  ssiger Temperaturbereich bei der Lagerung                              20   C bis 60   C   Stromaufmahme     s    en eier 0 8 A max   VR N1600E   1 7 A max   VR N900U    Gewicht     u  3    en nee nen etwa 7 6 kg  VR N160
209. nenennnnnennnnnnnenennnn 87   PTZ Camera Settings  COM1 COM2     sses 88   Defining a Preset PTZ Position        urnreerneneesnennernen nenne nee 90  Stopping the Recording Server    90  Display the  PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name    WINKOW 33h rennen 90  Defining a Preset Position eseese 92  Moving to Preset Positions by Events    sessen 92  Auto PTZ Patrolling  sesinin nnana ian 93   Camera Input Output Port and Events    secc 95  VO Settings 2 2 2 2 95  Input Output Terminal on Rear Panel          nersernrseeneeeen nn 97  Specifying a VMD Event           nesenensnsenennnnennnnennennnnn 97  Specifying Timer Events          cuunnnsnensensenennnnennnnnnnennenn 97  Specifying an Output       nnnensenennensennnnnnenennnnnennnnnnnenennnn 98   Advanced  Screen  nininini 98  Configuring Event Buttons    sesser 99  Specifying Generic Events    s es 100  Event Notification Settings               n2er0ennnnnennnnnnnnnenennen 102  Specifying an Output Port      nensensesnenennennennnnennennnnnnnennnn 102  Camera Output Settings         eee ecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 103   Motion  Settings  222    alas 104   General  Settings ices 22  Mean dBi aie 106  E mail Settings srpna degerialnrhte 107   AICHIVING 2422  42a 108  Precautions when Changing NAS Archive Settings         109  Precautions when Changing Archive Settings                  109   Database Settings 0 0    cceceecesecsessesecseeeeeeeseceeeeneetseeeeaees 110   Flash Memory Utility     ueseessernrseennnrnennn nenn nenn
210. network and Intranet on  the  OS Setting  screen  Doing so may cause the system to malfunction              Perferred DNS   0 0 0 0   Server   Alternate DNS   0 0 0 0   Server   Host Name VR N1600U E  vr n1600    VR N900U  vr n900       DNS Domain Name                      I    Applications       Main Menu List  continued     OS Setting  continued     When specifying analog camera network settings  VR N900U only        Item    Preset Values    Description        DNetwork adapter  interface name   continued     Enc Board Bus Master  Driver    Settings when you are using an analog camera network        Obtain an IP  address  automatically    Select check box      Do not select  check box       IP address      192 168 201 253       Subnet Mask      255 255 255 0             Memo    e To specify an IP address other than the default value  consult your system  administrator       f the host name is changed  you need to add a new Windows user in  User  Administration  under  Image Server Setting    rs Page 118    e Do not set the default gateway for both the camera network and Intranet on the   OS Setting  screen  Doing so may cause the system to malfunction              Default Gateway   0 0 0 0  Perferred DNS   0 0 0 0  Server   Alternate DNS   0 0 0 0  Server   Host Name   vr n900       DNS Domain Name                      Note          In VR N900U  analog input circuitry is considered as a network encoder  IP video server  and the IP address is set to    192 168 201 12    by   
211. nistator  screen appears        25 Camera Recording Administrator   Device Manager  F IR Axis 207W  192 168 0 5   HBR axis 212 PT2  192 168 0 2        Service Manager       HR WC  192 168 0 20        E ne c27 0 0 1     Scheduler     General Settings       Archive Setup       1O Setup       Event Buttons       140 Control               Camera Recording Administator  Screen    2 Select a device in the  Device Manager  section   and click the  Edit Device     button      The  Edit device settings  screen appears        Edit device settings    identify Video Device  Device Type   JVC C20 0215 Si  Device Name    JVC VN C20       Detect Device             Camera Settings            Device Serial Number    008088421403       Network Settings for Video Device  P address        192   168  0   20   Use DNS hostname    V Default Http Port            V Default Ftp Port    Root Password             Edit device settings  Screen      The following items can be specified        Item       Description         Identify Video Device          Device Type   For selecting the type of device from the list   Detect Click this button to enable automatic  Device detection of the device type and serial    number        Device Name    Name used to identify the device  You cannot  assign the same name to multiple devices           Camera Displays the camera setting screen   Settings      Device Serial   Serial number of the device  The 12   Number character MAC address of the device is    normally used  
212. nnel and signal  format to be used  VR N900U               P Lease P Infomation   Ese  Ode P Mac CH MAKER NAME   5 1 1 4 4 inalog   ODelete IP Infomation   1921682012 008088428301 NC Analoe In  Oup  P Lease Parameter  Start Address    192 168 0 100  ODown  Unit 1OUnits     SubnetMask  255 255 25 0  Gateway  192 168 0 254  DNS Server  Primary  192 168 0 253  2  gt   Secondry  192   8 0 252 z x  Baseret ony   NTSC 5   omain Name   Reserve MAC Address  Lease Time Lim mac  OYes  48hours  v P  lient    Only Camera    Any Client OAdd Opel   Cancel  he 4       23    Getting Started       During Initial Startup   Continued     Automatic Registration of Cameras   continued     6 Use the  SKIP  button to select  OK   followed by  pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER   button   k      The  Configure Device  screen appears        Detecting Device    Found a JVC device on this address       I 192 168 0 20       Optional  p This IP address does not hold a Camera   Do    camer     r Ldo nat know the a   Redetect it the next Administrator     Setup  Enter the password for the vi  account t       7 Enter the password for the network camera    e Press the  KEY  button to display the software keyboard    ce Page 28    e Use the keypad to move the mouse cursor over the  software keyboard      Pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button  inputs the characters on the keyboard into the password    field  3     11 Specify the display rate for each camera such  that the total display rate of all c
213. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 34 Using Still Images  GIFNPEG fles  SE ee ar  Select a Camera            nuuunnessenennnnenennnnennnnnennnnnnnnennnnn 34 Adang MALE SONIEN er er 87  Operating the Camera      enesnrnnneernernen nennen nennen nennen 35  Viewing Live Images via Mouse Control        enesserneener nennen 36  Displaying the  Live  Screen    s es 36  Select a View nn  36  Select a Camera oo    eeeeeecceesceceeetseeeeeeteeseeeesesaseaeeeteeaseaees 36  Viewing Images Using the PTZ Features   0 0 0    eee 37  Using Preset Positions 00 0    eeeeeseeseeeeeteeeeeeenreereeeeenees 38  Other Useful Functions       naersersernenrnernnnnenennnn nennen nennen 38  Playing Back Recorded Images via Front Panel Control        40  Select A VICW rennen 40  Searching Recorded Image Using a Specific Date Time        40  Playing  Skipping and Stopping Recorded Images             41  Adjusting the Playback Speed  Jog Shuttle Playback        41          Applications   Main iMenu List 2 2 68  List of Menu Screens            unsersesnnnennensnnennnnenennnnnnnnnnnn 68  Unit Setling 3 2 282 le a a a 69  OS Setting caai ee ei 72  Image Server Setting           nsersenennnennnnennennennnnennnnennnnnan 76  Auto Detect Setting u  80  Camera Record Setting            rresnnnnennenennnnennennnnennnnn 84   Adding Cameras          u ren 86  Analog Cameras  VR N900U        neesersernennennennnnnnennnn ne 86  Adding an Analog Camera  VR N900U     seese 86   Editing Device Settings          nennnennennenennen
214. ns       Defining a Preset PTZ  Position    Stopping the Recording Server    Stop the recording server before defining the PTZ camera settings       Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu    Main Menu      Unit Setting     OS Setting     Flash Memory Utility     HDD Utility     Event Audio Setting     Language Setting     Return to default settings    Image Server Setting      Live Viewing      Auto Detect Setting    Camera Record Setting      Exit     Operation  1 Up J Down Enter  Enter Cancel  Exit       Main Menu       25 Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager       FR AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5   H  R AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2   H RR NC  192 168 0 20   Scheduler      59 NR  127 0 0 1     Service Manager    Add Device       General Settings     Archive Setup      HO Setup       Matrix     Event Buttons          Generic Events       f   1O Control     Exit Be     Camera Recording Administator  Screen                2 Click the  Service Manager     button  The  Service Manager  screen appears        Service Manager    Recording Server running        Service Manager     Screen    3 Click the  Pause  button    Note     Display the  PTZ Preset Positions for  Device Name  window    The  PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  window lets you define  preset positions for the PTZ cameras       Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu    2 Selecta camera from  Device Manager  and click   Settings             Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager
215. nsitivity level in the  motion detection settings again when you change the picture  quality and set the exclusion areas at a later date           Defining Motion Detection Exclusion  Regions  You can specify specific areas to be excluded from motion detection    to prevent the detection of irrelevant motion  such as trees swaying  in the wind or cars that drive past continuously in the background       Select a camera from the  Device Manager  on  the  Camera Recording Administator  screen   and click  Exclude Regions     in  Settings        e  f the  Show Grid  check box is selected  the preview  screen appears  which is divided into small areas by a  grid  Areas highlighted in blue indicate the exclusion  areas              Define Exclusion Regions       Please use the left right mouse button to select deselect areas in the image that should be  excluded from motion detection  Motion will not be detected in the areas marked with blue     7    mn        oo    Auto    I    OK       Cancel    Mtr     Exclude Regions     Screen    2 To select an area  click and drag the mouse  pointer to move the grid on the screen    e Selected areas are highlighted in blue   Memo     Item Description    Set All Sets all sections in the grid on the preview  image as exclusion areas      Clear All Clears all sections in the grid on the preview  image that are specified as exclusion areas      Auto Click this button to automatically detect areas    with insignificant image changes  noises   tha
216. ntal damages     This limitation applies to   e Anything related to the software  services  content  including code  on third party internet sites  or third party programs   and  e Claims for breach of contract  breach of warranty  guarantee or condition  strict liability  negligence  or other tort to the  extent permitted by applicable law     It also applies even if Microsoft should have been aware of the possibility of the damages   The above limitation may not apply to you because your country may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental   consequential or other damages     13 Export Restrictions     The software is subject to United States export laws and regulations  You must comply with all domestic and international  export laws and regulations that apply to the software  These laws include restrictions on destinations  end users and end use     For additional information  see www microsoft com exporting     Getting Started       Playing Back Recorded Images via Mouse Control                42  Co nte nts Select a view      unnnsensensensennnnnnerennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnn 43  Searching Recorded Image Using  Time Navigation          43  Searching Recorded Image Using the Timeline Browser        44  Searching Recorded Image Using Sequence                  44  Searching Recorded Image from the Alert List                   45  Getting Started Smart Search  ts sistas alanine 45  Features    ne en el 2 Playing  Skipping and Stopping Recorded Images         
217. nternet Protocol  TCP IP  Properties  General   Alternate Configuration  You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports    this capability  Otherwise  you need to ask your network administrator for  the appropriate IP settings        Wibiaie an IP sie siimaa     Use the following IP address        Obtain DNS server address automatically     Use the following DNS server addresses     Cancel          7 Select  Use the following IP address   8 Set  IP address  to 192 168 1 11  9 Set  Subnet Mask  to 255 255 255 0       10 Set  Default gateway  to 192 168 1 254    Internet Protocol  TCP IP  Properties  General    You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports  this capability  Otherwise  you need to ask your network administrator for  the appropriate IP settings      Obtain an IP address automatically     Use the following IP address   IP address  168 1  11    Subnet mask  255   255  0    Default gateway  168  1   254    Obtain DNS serve idre automatical     Use the following DNS server addresses   Preferred DNS server     Alternate DNS server     11 Click the  OK  button    12 Click the  OK  button on the  Local Area  Connections Proparties  screen             SS Network Connections ale  Bile Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Advanced Help ar  Qe      BD seah   gt  gt  Folders  Fiz     5    Network Connections v Go  LAN or High Speed Internet       Network Tasks     onnection 2    El Create a new   d  Firewalled  ipl let Adapter  2    an
218. nts  Set the priority level to a  value between    0     lowest priority  and     1000     highest priority                  Memo   e This unit receives generic events from the port that is specified  in  Alert Port  on the  Advanced  screen      Page 98                 Notification settings       Item    Description       Send e mail if this  event occurs    Select this check box to send an e mail alert  when an event occurs        Include image  from camera          Select this check box to attach the currently   recorded images to the e mail when the input  event is triggered  Select a camera from the   list below the check box                Event rules string       Item    Description       Event substring    For specifying the expression to search for  during data analysis by this unit    Specify at least one expression  and click the   Add  button  The specified expression is  added to the  Event message include  field   If you have added multiple expressions as  one item  the expressions enclosed in the  quotation marks must appear together in the  data in the specified sequence in order to  match the criteria        Event message  include    Displays the string that is used for the actual  data analysis  The field is not directly  editable  However  you can place the cursor  inside the field and click the following  buttons        Add    Adds the information in the  Event substring   to the  Event message include  field        Adds     to the  Event message include  
219. nual     The recorded images are saved as database                               ca     Camera Settings  Screen                                                     E Specify the database settings    Item Description      In case of For selecting the action to take when  database problems are found in the database  The  failure the   Number of options available varies depending  following on whether archiving is enabled   action Select    Archive no repair      If you have  syould be selected another option  the data may be lost  taken if problems occur in the database            Repair Scan Delete if fails      Two different repair methods  quick repair  recovery  and  complete repair  scan   are used  Content of the database will  be deleted if both repair methods fail      Repair Delete if fails      The fast repair method is used  Content of the database will be  deleted if fast repair fails      Archive if fails      This option is available only if archiving is enabled for the  camera  The fast repair method is used  Content of the  database will be archived if fast repair fails      Delete no repair     Do not select this item    Archive no repair       This option is available only if archiving is enabled for the  camera  Content of the database is archived  Select this  option               5 Datebase  path    Do not change the settings                       Memo      The database can store up to 600 000 records    e The maximum database size is set to 108 000 records
220. o      When sending out audio data to VN V26U  make sure that the  firmware version of VN V26U is 1 01 or a newer version   VR   N1600U E        Connecting a UPS    Connecting an uninterruptible power supply  UPS  to the hard disk   will protect it from damage by automatically shutting down all   operations prior to switching off the power supply in the event of a   power failure      Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  3 2  keypad button at the same time  to start up the  UPS SetUp  screen    2 Select    UPS Mode    and press the  OK  button    3 Connect the UPS communication cable to the   SERIAL  port on the rear panel    4 Connect the power cable of this unit to the UPS  power output connector    132    5 Switch on the power of the UPS  followed by the  power of this unit    Note     e Consult your nearest JVC dealer or service center for details on  the types of UPS that can be used      Make sure that the UPS communication cable is connected  before switching on the power of this unit    e Do not disconnect the communication cable when operations  are in progress    e When a power failure occurs while formatting a hard disk or  archiving  subsequent operations may be affected even when a  UPS is connected      The recorded images may not be played back properly if they  are not archived before the power failure   c  Page 110    e  f you are not using a UPS  do not select  UPS SetUp  on the the   UPS SetUp  screen  Inappropriate selections may affect  s
221. on on the mail      server to be used if you have selected     Mail    in the  Error Report   item      SMTP Server Setting for the outgoing mail server   Port Number   25  User ID    Password    POP Server Setting for the incoming mail server   Port Number   110  User ID      Password    SMTP   NONE Enables you to select the method of user authentication when  Authentication Authentication sending out a mail  For queries on the settings  consult your system  POP before SMTP administrator   Send Test Mail Click to send out a test mail to the address specified in the  Mail  Send List  item        amp  Emergency Record   Page 52       70             Item    Preset Values    Description    Reference  Page          Serial VR N900U        Speed    Speed  1800  2400  4800      9600    19200  38400       Data Lenght    7   8       Parity      NONE    ODD  EVEN       Stop Bit        1  2    Lets you specify the settings for the serial ports controlling the  cameras  Please refer to the  Instruction Manual  of the camera in  use to configure the parameters correctly for all settings        Encode Mode   VR N900U     Variable File Size    Average File   Size   Constant File Size    Lets you select the encoding mode for converting analog image  data into digital data  You can choose from the following three  modes    Specify the encoding size control method and target file size when  encoding JPEG files    Variable File Size    The file size increases or decreases depending on the image
222. or    Switches between the  Live  mode and  Browse  mode    The indicator lights up when in the  Live  mode    Pressing the  LIVE BROWSE  button when the wallpaper screen is  displayed shows the  Live  screen    Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and press and hold the  LIVE   BROWSE  button at the same time to log out of the system    Press the  FUNCTION  button   ALARM RESET  button and the   SELECT  button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well  as the internal distribution server     Memo    e When  Auto Logon  is enabled  the login operation starts  automatically immediately after logging out   rsPage 69  Unit  Setting            17    Getting Started       Part Names and Functions   VR N900U   continued     Rear Panel                               VGA OUT                JAC IN 120V 240V    50Hz   60Hz       Jees                                           Je                4  sera            amp    POWER  switch  Switches the power on or off   Memo        e Be sure to press and hold down the  OPERATE  button on the  front panel to shut down the system before switching off the  power supply        D  AC IN 120V   240VH 50Hz 60Hz  power input  terminal   Connect to an AC outlet using the power cable supplied       RESET    Resets the system  Press this button when a malfunction occurs   Note        e Do not press this button in normal circumstances         26   AUDIO IN 1 AUDIO IN 2  audio input terminals 1 2   RCA     Connect to the audio output terminal of t
223. or otherwise using the software component   you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement  If you do not v    Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement  If you    choose No  the setup will close  To install NVR Viewer 1 0f  you  must accept this agreement      lt  Back       InstallShield Wizard    Customer Information  Please enter your information     User Name        Company Name   JVC          Install this application for     Anyone who uses this computer  all users     C Only for me  User      lt  es       InstallShield Wizard    Choose Destination Location  Select folder where Setup will install files     Setup will install YR N900 Viewer 1 0f in the following folder     To install to this folder  click Next  To install to a different  folder  click Browse and select another folder     Destination Folder    C   Program Fi les  J  C  NVR Viewer          InstallShield Wizard   __    Login to the NVR Viewer    Start Copying Files    PaA EA eee Sek T Double click the NVR Viewer shortcut on the    Setup has enough information to start copying the program files  If you  want to review or change any settings  click Back  If you are satisfied desktop  with the settings  click Next to bezin copying files              InstallShield Wizard  Setup Status       Memo   WR Viewer 1 0f Setup is performing the requested operations   e  f the NVR Viewer shortcut is not found on the desktop  select     NVR Viewer    from the  Start  menu   roa ne   The NVR View
224. or specifying the event from  the  Defined events  list on the  I O Setup   screen       Defined events          AXIS 207W     AXIS 212 PTZ    Bea RE    H NVR    Add new event        Add new output event        Add VMD Event  Motion Detection  Advanced             OK        VO Setup  Screen    2 Click the  Add new event     button    The  Multiple Input Events  screen appears        Multiple Input Events    WC YN C20  Enabled Input Event s               Available Input Event s          Open input 1  TCP event   event   t   Close input 2  TCP event  Motion detection  TCP event        Multiple Input Events  Screen                               Item Description   D Input Displays the device name for which the input  events for   event is specified   This is a read only field    device   2  Available   Lists the available input events    Input  Event S    3 By You can enable an event by selecting it in the   Available Input Event S   list     followed by  clicking the  _    button    4 Ea For selecting an event in the  Enabled Input  Event S   list     and moving it to the  Available  Input Event S   list    Doing so disables the  event        Edit For editing the event setting selected in the   Enabled Input Event S   list      Enabled Lists the input events that can be used   Input  Event S                 96    3 Select the required event from the  Available  Input Event S   list and click the _   button to  add the event    Specify the event name and e mail settings on the  A
225. ork   VR N1600U E    Realtek RTL8169 8110 Family Gigabit Ethernet NIC  LAN1  Camera Network   VR N900U    Obtain an IP address automatically  Not Selected    IP address  192 168 0 253    Subnet Mask  255 255 255 0    Default Gateway  0 0 0 0    Perferred DNS Server  0 0 0 0    Alternate DNS Server  0 0 0 0    Host Name  vr n1600   vr n900    DNS Domain Name  None              148             Intel     8225xER PCI Adapter  LAN2  Intranet                                                                    Obtain an IP address automatically  Not Selected   IP address  192 168 1 253   Subnet Mask  255 255 255 0   Default Gateway  192 168 1 254   Perferred DNS Server  0 0 0 0   Alternate DNS Server  0 0 0 0    Host Name  vr n1600    DNS Domain Name  None    Enc Board Bus Master Driver  Analog Camera Network  VR N900U    Obtain an IP address automatically  Not Selected   IP address  192 168 201 253   Subnet Mask  255 255 255 0   Default Gateway  0 0 0 0   Perferred DNS Server  0 0 0 0   Alternate DNS Server  0 0 0 0    Host Name  vr n900    DNS Domain Name  None    Day and Time Properties   Automatically synchronize with an Internet server  Not Selected        Time Zone         GMT 05 00  Eastern Time  VR 1600U VR N900U     GMT  Greenwich Mean Time  VR 1600E           Auto Detect Settings  Auto Detect Settings      Page 113        IP Lease     Enable   Disable       IP Lease Parameter                                                                                           Start Add
226. ot connected to the network   Indicator Blinking   Connected to the network   Right Green Off Not communicating   Indicator Blinking   Communicating                             CAMERA CONTROL  camera control terminal  Lets you control the analog cameras     Signal input output terminals    For operating VR N1600U E using external alarm signals or signals  received from external devices  or for operating external devices by  outputting signals     Memo        e Diameter of applicable cable  AWG22 to AWG28          Rear I O Terminals          fis   e                 1             iO  zd      io              VGA OUT       EES           PALARM RESET  PEXT REC IN   PWARNING OUT   POPTION OUT1  FOPTION OUT2     gt   oO  zZ  Lu  S  cc  lu     Lu  n    POPE ON OFF  PCOMMON  PALARM OUT  PREC TALLY    eN Yt  O_O oO oO                                                                              H  PCOMMON   r    PCOMMON                                                          H                                            H  H   H   X          J                           SIGNAL GND    E Input ports  D  ALARM IN 1 to 4  alarm input terminals 1 to 4    Alarm recording is activated when signals are input to these  terminals     D  EMERGENCY  emergency input terminal    Recording is activated in all cameras when a signal is input to this  terminal     D  ALARM RESET  alarm reset input terminal    Output from the alarm output terminal is stopped when a signal is  input during output of the Ala
227. ounting  keep the internal temperature of rack assembly 40  C or less     e When using rack mount  keep the clearance between the rack and the rear of unit 150mm or more     e When installing this unit or the like to the rack  refer to the consumption current value of the nameplate of each  device so that the current capacity  including rated capacity of power supply wire  of the rack is not exceeded     e Use the rack that meets the following requirements     e must be equipped with overcurrent protection  e must be equipped with protective earthing conductor power plug and socket    To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack  you must take special precautions to ensure that the system  remains stable    The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety    This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack    When mounting this unit in a partially filled rack  load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom  of the rack    If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices  install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack     CAUTION  Before you mount this device in a rack  make sure that the rack is secure and in no danger of tipping over                 WARNING   It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re record  pre recorded tapes  records  or discs without the consent  of the owner of copyright in the sound or video recording       
228. oup has been modified by WinNIT  VR N1600 Administrator     You need to login again before ViewGroup changes can be saved              Creating Groups and Views  E Creating a group    Select  Screen Setup  from the main menu    e  f the  Live  or  Browse  screen is displayed  you can also  click on the  Setup  tab using the mouse     Main Menu      Flash Memory Utility     HDD Utility     Event Audio Setting     Language Setting     Return to default settings    ing    Select      Auto Detect Setting    Camera Record Setting      Exit     Operation  1 Up l Down Enter  Enter Cancel   Exit       Main Menu    2 Select the root folder in which you want to  create a new group       02        a     Shoe  Create New Group  Button       3 Click the  Create New Group  button in the   Views  section      A new group is created        B  amp  Ax        ea  2  2  x    Shortcut    E Creating  Views  within a group      Select the group in which you want to create a  new view        a   amp   2  g    harten    2 Click the  Create New View  button  and select a  layout for the new view         Shared    29 Default Group  4   9  Default View   em   B Private        Create New View  Button       I rs  1x1  1 3 Wide  2x2 p          145    EEE   2 4 wide  1 7  ae View Layouts  2 8  4x3 Wide  4x4  5x5  6x6  7x7  8x8    E   n     E       I rtcut       5              el ff El                Pe                          Has   Z347  EE           EEE             e A new view is created under the group
229. out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock  Never spill liquid of any kind on the  appliance       Do not attempt to service this appliance yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous    voltage or other hazards  Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel       Unplug this appliance from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following    conditions    a  When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed    b  If liquid has been spilled into the appliance    c  If the appliance has been exposed to rain or water    d  If the appliance does not operate normally by following the operating instructions  Adjust only those controls  that are covered by the operating instructions as improper adjustment of other controls may result in  damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the appliance to normal  operation    e  If the appliance has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged    f  When the appliance exhibits a distinct change in performance   this indicates a need for service       When replacement parts are required  be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by    the manufacturer that have the same characteristics as the original part  Unauthorized substitutions may result  in fire  electric shock  or other hazards       Upon completion of any service or repairs to this appliance  ask the service technician to perform routine safe
230. pears after a short while   Memo        e  f you have previously logged in to the NVR Viewer  a message  will appear asking if you want the view that was used during the  last login to be displayed   Only when connecting from a  surveillance computer     Main View    Select this check box to restore the view that you last  used in the main window of the  NVR Viewer       Detached Views      Select this check box to display the views on the  Primary  Display  screen  multi monitor  or floating screen        Note       When you log out after reaching the maximum number of  distribution clients  you may need to wait for several minutes  before you can establish the connection again    e When multiple computers are connected and audio sound is  played back  the sound may be distorted        4 Set the display language according to the   country of use   O  Click the  W  button at the top right corner of the  screen    D Select  Language  from the menu that appears        Select the language used in your country from the  displayed submenu      Click  OK  when you see a dialog box    6  Click the  x  button at the top right corner to exit the  NVR Viewer       The viewer will display in the selected language  during the next startup      V  Button  x  Button    My SC  IE     wy Joystick Setup  E Keyboard Setup    Language  gt                          If Danish  Denmark   German  Germany     French  France        Uses of the NVR Viewer Exiting Logging Out of the NVR Viewer    For us
231. pping Recorded  Images    Use the  Time Navigation  of the NVR Viewer to perform playback   stop  and skip operations     Browse Button              IP        lta   ld   a           Browse  Screen                          7am    11 21 33  AM   gt    Jo  Time  Slider  i  Playback  Slider    Play Button          The buttons and sliders have the following functions     Browse Button    a Moves to the previous image on the selected camera   A       frame by frame reverse playback         Moves to the next image on the selected camera  El  gt      frame by frame forward playback      Moves to the first image in the previous sequence of  I   _ the selected camera   This function may not work    ra properly when there is no sequence or for some  _    sequence lengths      Moves to the first image in the next sequence of the       gt     selected camera   This function may not work  W J   properly if there is no sequence or for some sequence     lengths      ir Moves to the oldest recorded image of the selected  EE      camera   This function may not work properly at a   _     playback speed of 10x or higher      Moves to the latest recorded image of the selected         camera   This function may not work properly at a     playback speed of 10x or higher         Note      The browse buttons are only enabled when a camera has been  selected      It may take several minutes for moving to complete after you  have pressed the browse buttons          Note that if the  buttons are clicked
232. ption   Online     E mail  and  Patrolling   in different colors       Online Bar       Pink Indicates the period during which this unit always  displays images of the selected camera        Yellow Indicates the period during which images of the  selected camera are displayed when an event is  input to this unit                   E mail Bar   Active periods are indicated in blue     Patrolling Bar   Active periods are indicated in gray        Memo      The Patrolling Bar is only available when at least one  Patrol  scheme  has been registered in advance  When several patrol  schemes have been registered and are used successively   changes between the schemes are indicated by a thin vertical  line       Page 94    e To check the  Patrol scheme   click the bar of the period to check  in the calendar section  The  Patrol scheme  specified for that  period will appear in the  Patrol scheme  list        Specifying Image Recording Settings      Select  Camera Record Setting  from the main  menu       23 Camera Recording Administrator    Device Manager  HB AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5      BQ AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2        Service Manager       Add Device           BR we  192 168 0 20     Scheduler           v NVR  127 0 0 1     General Settings       Archive Setup    Settings               Settings           1O Setup       Matrix     Event Buttons       Generic Events             HO Control           Camera Recording Administator  Screen    2 Select a camera from  Device Manager  and c
233. put  continuously    e During simultaneous recording and playback of recorded  images  the playback image may pause and the sound may be  interrupted   This has no impact on recording to the system or  additional hard disk            Writing Images Audio  Sound to CDs  DVDs and  Other Media  Export     You can write  export  recorded images or audio sound to other  media       The VR N1600U VR N1600E VR N900U unit enables you to  write images and audio sound to a CD R  CD RW  DVD R  DVD   RW  or USB memory device    e Ona surveillance computer  you can write recorded images and  audio to the desktop or to any folder you select     Burning a CD DVD  Operation on the unit        e Steps 1 to 9 are common steps between writing to CD DVD  and USB memory devices                Double click the  Export  bar on the  Browse   screen    2 Enter the start date and time    e Click the  Set  button to input the date time of the Master  Time area     3 Enter the end date and time    e When the  Set  button is clicked  the time input will be a  second ahead of the date time displayed in the Master  Time area     4 Select a camera from the  Source   list  and click  the  AVI JPEG Export     or  Database Export      button    e You can also select   Current View Source   when  selecting the source  When   Current View Source   is  selected  images from all cameras within the view are  exported      This export dialog appears  The specified start time  end  time  and camera are shown in the d
234. r   including  without limitation  damages for loss of business profits  business interruption  loss of business information  or  any other pecuniary loss  arising out of the use of or inability to use the Software or the provision of or failure to provide  proper support  even if Milestone or JVC have been advised of the possibility of such damages  Absent any wilful  misconduct or gross negligence  The entire liability of Milestone and JVC under any provision of this agreement shall be  limited to the amount paid by you for the Software portion of JVC s NVR product     5  Miscellaneous      a  You acknowledge that the Software is embedded in JVC s NVR products  and you may not make copies of the Software   If necessary for backup and archival purposes  please contact JVC      b  You may not remove the Software from JVC s NVR product nor distribute copies of the Software to third parties      c  You may not reverse engineer  decompile  or disassemble any of the Software except to the extent permitted by  applicable law which cannot be contractually waived      d  You may permanently transfer all of your rights for the Software  provided the recipient of JVCOs NVR product  incorporating the Software agrees to the terms of this agreement    6  Termination    Without prejudice to any other rights  Milestone may terminate this license agreement if you fail to comply with its terms   and conditions  In such event you must cease to use the Software     7  Governing Law   These Lic
235. r the compensation of  losses incurred in the event that recording or playback  fails due to defects in this unit or its hard disk drive      Images recorded on the HDD will be deleted when you  replace it with a new disk  Note also that recorded images  may be deleted when you upgrade the software for this  unit     Clock      Use of a time server is recommended to ensure recording  at an accurate time       There may be a daily error of 10 to 20 seconds depending  on the operating environment       The clock time may vary significantly when the lithium  battery level used for backup in this unit is running low       Connect the time server to the LAN2 network        Precautions when Moving this Unit    Remove all connected cords before moving    Turn off the power and remove the power plug before  moving this unit  Failure to do so may cause damage on  the cords  and result in fire or electric shock       Moving of this unit or installation work is strictly prohibited  when the power of this unit is on or immediately after the  power is turned off  approximately 1 minute      The HDD continues to move under its own inertia for  some time after the power is disconnected  and exertion  of vibration or impact during this interval may result in  HDD failure       When moving this unit  wrap it using cushioning materials  to protect it from external shock       Handle this unit carefully without exerting vibration or  impact on it     Precautions for Handling Power Cords      Do
236. ra   s menu  Left cursor   E Exit    Exits PTZ camera control    Memo     e You can use the  SKIP  buttons to change the item to control      You can also use the cursor buttons on the keypad to control  movement in the direction indicated by the respective buttons      You can use the  13 CANCEL  ZOOM OUT CANCEL  button to  exit the PTZ camera control mode    ik          Note    e If you are unable to establish connection with the camera by  Clicking the  Connect ENTER   button  try again after stopping  and rebooting the recording server    Page 85  Service Manager               Display and Saving of  Maintenance Information    This section describes procedures for displaying various    information       Press and hold the  FUNCTION  button  and  press the  6 HOME  5 HOME  keypad button at  the same times        The  Maintenance Information  screen appears     Power Failure History    Date   Time    2007 07 19 00 45  2007 07 26 16 03    Information    Screen Resolution 1280 x 1024    33042       x VR N1600U E  only    BE        Item    Description        D Power Failure  History    The power failure history appears  The   Power Failure History  is empty if no  power failure has occurred in the past          Information           VR N1600U E        Screen Displays the screen resolution    Resolution This is expressed in units of    vertical pixel  x horizontal pixel       Operating Time   Displays the total operating time of VR     N1600U E   This is expressed in the     hou
237. ra Type  Fixed   Camera Settings  Specifying Image Recording Settings     Page 55    Speedup Settings   Frame Rate  8    Frame   Sec    Min   Hour       Recording Settings                            Desired framerate  8    Frame   Sec    Min   Hour   Enable speedup  Not Selected    When to store images in database Always  Never   Conditionally   On motion  Selected    On event  Not Selected       seconds pre post recordings on motion event  3        Database Settings  Database Settings   ts Page 110        Max records in database     Selected   108000        Max timespan in database     Not Selected        Archive automatically when database is full     Selected        In case of database failure the following action syould be taken       Repair Scan Delete if fails  Repair Delete if  fails  Archive if fails  Delete no repair     Archive no repair        PTZ Preset  Display the  PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name  window       Page 90              Presets   Use preset positions from device  Not Selected   Preset Position on Events   Preset Position on Events  Not Selected           PTZ Patrolling Settings  Auto PTZ Patrolling       Page 93        Patrol scheme     My patrol sheme        PTZ Patrolling Schedule Settings                Stay at each position in the patrol schedule in seconds   5    Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete in seconds   Motion detection is disabled   3    during movement    Motion Triggered PTZ Patrolling Settings   Disable patrolling sched
238. re to press and hold down the  OPERATE  button on the  front panel to shut down the system before switching off the  power supply  Turning off the power switch on the rear panel  while the device is in the OPERATE ON mode may cause  malfunction        30    Switching Operation On   Off    Switching On Off Using Operate Button on  Front Panel    You can switch operation to ON or OFF     E Switching Operation On    1  When Operation is OFF  Press the  OPERATE   button    e The  OPERATE  indicator starts blinking   e The  OPERATE  indicator lights up  indicating that  operation is enabled     Memo      When the power switch on the rear panel is turned on  the  system starts up automatically until the OPERATE ON mode is  activated           E Switching Operation Off       When operation is ON  Press and hold the   OPERATE  button for about 2 seconds    e The  OPERATE  indicator starts blinking      The screen display disappears and the  OPERATE   indicator goes off  indicating that operation has been  turned off    Note      Do not turn off the power until operation has been turned off           Switching On Off Using Input Output  Terminal on Rear Panel    For details on the layout of the input and output terminals on the  rear panel  refer to  Rear I O Terminals   ss Page 15      E Switching Operation On    1  When operation is OFF  Set the  OPE ON OFF   terminal to make for at least 50 ms  e The  OPERATE  indicator starts blinking     e The  OPERATE  indicator lights up  indic
239. ress  192 168 0 100    Unit 1 Unit to  20Units  to 99 Units  Subnet Mask  255 255 255 0    Gateway  192 168 0 254    DNS Server   Primary  192 168 0 253    Secondry  192 168 0 252    Domain Name  None    Lease Time Limit  No   Yes   Client  Only Camera   Any Client  Reserve MAC Address  None    Distribution Settings  Distribution Settings  Details      Page 118    Server Configuration   Name  Server    Port  80    Enable Outside IP Address  Not Selected    Max number of clients  11    User Administration   Full access for all users  Selected    Log Files   Days to log  10    Audit Log   Audit Log Enable Audit Logging  Not Selected   Language Support and XML Encoding   Language  Western European  iso 8859 1               149    Others    Default Value List   continued        User Administration  Distribution Settings     Page 118   VR N1600U E                   User Password Type   vr n1600  vr n1600  Basic user   Administrator  None   Windows or Active Directory user   VR N900U   User Password Type   vr n900  vr n900  Basic user   Administrator  None   Windows or Active Directory user                    HDD Utility  Advanced Settings t  Page 116   NAS User Settings                               Password  None   User name  None   Auto Archive   Enable archiving to internal HDD  Selected   Troubleshooting    Symptom Action       Power cannot be turned on  Check to ensure that the power cable has been plugged in correctly   Check to ensure that the power switch on the rear panel
240. riggers an action  equivalent to the  Connect  button  and canceling the alarm is  equivalent to the action when you pressed the  Disconnect   button  Control of the  Connect  and  Disconnect  is valid only  when these buttons are enabled     Note        e  f you are configuring the settings or performing an audio  playback test in the  Camera Record Setting  or  Event Audio  Setting  of the main menu  do so after you have closed this  dialog box       f the performance meter lights up in yellow or red  the  microphone sound may be interrupted  To make sure that audio  sound is successfully transmitted  perform operations such as  temporarily stopping the recording operation so that the  performance meter does not light up in yellow or red    Performance Meter      Page 27        127    Applications       Event Audio Settings  VR   N1600U E     This feature plays back a specific audio file from the designated  destination on the camera or this unit when a generic event    registered with this unit is triggered or when alarm signals are input    to the rear terminal  The Event Audio Settings screen enables you  to configure the above setting as well as other settings related to  the event audio feature     1 Select  Event Audio Setting  from  Main Menu        The  Event Audio Setting  screen appears     Alarm 1 falling    Sond  tional expression    Audio files v 1    times       Audio playing for TPaddress    Audio files copy    C  NVR  Camera 17 127 001 O Setting copy     Pas
241. rm Out signals    Turns off the  ALARM  indicator   on the unit  Press and hold down  to turn off the  WARNING  indicator        amp   EXT REC IN  external recording input terminal    Recording in all cameras is started or stopped by an external signal   Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video signal is  being input        OPE ON OFF  Operate ON OFF terminal  Switches between OPERATE ON or OFF when a signal is input    t  Page 30     Note       Input ports  amp  to   will not operate when the main menu is  displayed  Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the  main menu is displayed                ono RIAL                 ser                E Output ports     COMMON  signal ground terminal    This is a common ground terminal  Connect it to the signal ground  terminal on the connected device   This can be used when there  are insufficient common ground terminals         ALARM OUT  alarm output terminal  Outputs a signal when recording is started by an alarm       WARNING OUT  warning output terminal    Outputs a signal when an error such as operation abnormality  occurs on the hard disk      44   REC TALLY  recording status output terminal   Outputs the recording status of this unit       OPTION OUT1  OPTION OUT2  OPT OUT output  terminals 1 2   Outputs a signal when an event is detected       COMMON  signal ground terminal   Same as          SIGNAL GND  signal ground terminal    This is a common ground terminal  Connect it to the signal ground  ter
242. rmation     The  IP Information  list contains information on the  IP address  of     Page 113  the automatically detected camera  MAC address  number of video   ss Page 23         amp  Reserve MAC    Configure the  Reserve MAC Address  if you want to assign a                address assignment function according to the settings        Address specific IP address to the cameras  A specific IP address is always  mapped to a MAC address  Enter a value in the  MAC  and  IP   fields  and click  Add  to set the addresses  To cancel the setting   select a displayed MAC and IP address  and click  Dell      OK Cancel     Clicking this button closes the setup screen  and starts stops the IP           82          Note        e When the    Do not detect in the future     check box on the  Detect  Device  screen is selected during automatic detection  the   Detect Device  screen of the said camera will not appear during  subsequent automatic detection operations  You can add the  camera manually to enable its detection again   Adding  Cameras       Page 86     Detecting Device    Found a J  C YN C20 device on this address    J 192 168 0 13      Optional    r This IP address does not hold a Camera     Do not detect it in the Future     Ido not know the password to this camera   Redetect it the next time I start the Administrator     Setup    Enter the password for the video device administrator  account here     es          Applications       Main Menu List  continued     Camera Record Set
243. rom the first IP address        Subnet Mask For specifying the subnet mask for the    cameras        Default Gateway For specifying the gateway for the    cameras        DNS Server For specifying the DNS server address for    the camera s         Domain Name For specifying the domain name for the    cameras        Lease Time Limit For specifying the valid period of the IP  address assigned to the cameras  If    Yes     is selected  you can set the lease time in    units of hours        Client For selecting whether to apply restrictions  on the device when assigning the IP  address  If    Only Camera    is selected  IP  address will only be assigned to the  corresponding camera  If    Any Client    is  selected  IP address will be assigned to all  devices     Reserve MAC Configure the  Reserve MAC Address  if  Address you want to assign a specific IP address to  the cameras  A specific IP address is  always mapped to a MAC address  Enter a  value in the MAC and IP fields  and click   Add  to set the addresses  To cancel the  setting  select a displayed MAC and IP  address  and click  Del                  4 Click  OK     e Doing so hides the setting screen and starts IP Lease   e Select    Disable    in Step 2 to stop IP Lease     113       Applications       Auto Detect Settings   continued     Using the Auto Detect Feature    The Auto Detect feature enables automatic detection of network  cameras     Memo        e When multicast packets are configured such that they do not  p
244. rs minutes seconds    format           Close          Closes the  Maintenance Information   screen           137    Others       Export Viewer    You can view data exported to a USB memory device  CD R RW  or  DVD R RW on the computer     Starting the Export Viewer      Insert the USB memory device containing the  exported data into the USB port of the computer       The USB memory device is automatically recognized by  the computer as a removable disk     2 Go to the Start menu  and select  Windows  Explorer  in  All Programs   Accessories       The  Windows Explorer  appears     3 Select the  Exported Images  folder in the  removable disk from the folder list in the  Explorer       The exported folder appears on the list on the right               S Exported Images    Eile Edit View Favorites Tools        Help        vy  Back   7 Search Folders           ss     E  Exported Images  Folders   a    og ae y H      C  My Documents    20070709055744 _20070709055749_CurrentView    My Computer      Se SPLO1Z5_  1_00 C        Se Local Disk  D      S  Removable Disk  E      Select    RK KK  KK  KK  KK             Obytes 3 My Computer    Memo             The name of the exported folder is indicated as follows  The date  in the folder name indicates the time interval of export   e  YYYYMMDDhhmmss_YYYYMMDDhhmmss  _ Camera    Model  Camera name          4 Double click the data folder in the list on the  right side of the Explorer    e A file list appears in the right list     5 Double cl
245. s Manual available on  the website of Milestone Systems  http   www milestonesys com    e The URL address may be subject to changes   7  Transact    Not used     _  8  Exit Closes the  Camera Recording Administator  screen       9  Device Manager Displays the list of all added devices and connected cameras  which provides you with a    summarized view of the surveillance system   40  Add Device    Starts the  Device Setup Wizard   r  Page 86  1  Edit Device    Displays the  Edit device settings  screen  r  Page 87  19  Remove Device For deleting a device selected in the  Device Manager  section  9     Note    e  f you remove the device  you will not be able to view recorded images  Do not delete  devices that are needed to view recorded images subsequently  In this case  select     Disabled    under  Camera Monitor Setup       Page 56  on the  Camera Settings   screen  To view recorded images  cancel    Disabled    in  Camera Monitor Setup    43  Settings    For specifying the recording settings for a selected camera or settings for a selected re Page 55  audio device  re Page 59  19 VO Setup    Displays the  I O Setup  screen  re Page 95  45  Event Buttons    Displays the  Event Buttons  screen  r  Page 99  10 Generic Events    Displays the  Generic Events  screen  r  Page 100  TD VO Control    Displays the  I O Control  screen  r  Page 102                      85    Applications       Adding Cameras    To specify settings on camera connection  you first need to add the  req
246. setting and automatic camera registration when  starting up this unit for the first time        Before Starting Up       The DHCP setting is required for the IP camera beforehand   Start up this unit first  then switch the camera on after  confirming that the  Auto Detect Setting  window is displayed      Refer to the user manual supplied with the camera for  instructions on how to specify the IP camera settings    e By default  Time zone is set to GMT  Specify a Time zone  according to the region used  Refer to the INSTRUCTIONS on  how to specify a Time zone settings              Keypad    SEIS     TG        27  0090106 5     16 ENTER  Button  KEY  Button  SKIP  Button                                                                                   VR N900U                                                        ZOOM IN ENTER   Button     KEY  Button  SKIP  Button    Starting the unit  I Turn on the power switch at the rear panel   e Doing so starts up the unit        Selecting a language    The  Language Setting  screen appears when you start up this unit  for the first time  Select the language to use using the steps below     r      Language Selection  English      OK       k d         Select a language  e Use the  2    or  10 0    8    button to select a language   3     2 Use the  SKIP  button to select  OK   followed by  pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER   button   k      The    The system is being set up     message may appear  depending on the setting  and the sy
247. simultaneously  displayed   VR N900U           Frame Rate   This is the viewing frame rate    Select  Unlimited   default value  same as  live settings    Medium   25   of the frame  rate   or  Low   5   of the frame rate    depending on the frame rate specified in   Live Settings   e Page 56  on the   Camera Settings  screen              Maintain If this check box is selected  images will  Image not be stretched to fit the size of the  Aspect display position  Images will be displayed  Ration in the aspect ratio  horizontal to vertical   ratio of the screen  that they have been  recorded       Update on If this check box is selected  the camera   s    Motion images will only be updated on the  Live   screen when motion is detected                         amp   Sound on Enables notification with a simple sound  Motion when motion is detected while viewing  Detection images from the camera on the  Live   screen    Always off Does not produce sound notification when  motion is detected    Always on Notifies with a sound each time motion is  detected           63    Basic Operation       Screen Setup  continued     Adjusting Camera Settings  continued        Item Description         Sound on   Enables notification with a simple alert sound  Event when events related to the selected camera   occur while viewing images from the camera   on the  Live  screen    To use this feature  you need to configure the   event notification setting   c  Page 102           Always off Does not ou
248. sing  and  the language code of the device where you installed the software  Microsoft uses this information to make the Internet   based services available to you     e Web Content Features   Features in the software can retrieve related content from Microsoft and provide itto you  To provide the content  these  features send to Microsoft the type of operating system  name and version of the software you are using  type of browser  and language code of the device where the software was installed  Examples of these features are clip art  templates   online training  online assistance and Appshelp   These features only operate when you activate them  You may choose to switch them off or not use them    e Digital Certificates   The software uses digital certificates  These digital certificates confirm the identity of Internet users sending X 509  standard encrypted information  The software retrieves certificates and updates certificate revocation lists  These  security features operate only when you use the Internet    e Auto Root Update   The Auto Root Update feature updates the list of trusted certificate authorities  You can switch off the Auto Root Update  feature    e Windows Media Player   When you use Windows Media Player  it checks with Microsoft for    e Compatible online music services in your region    e New versions of the player  and   e Codecs if your device does not have the correct ones for playing content  You can switch off this feature  For more  information
249. so   Memo  pressing the  ZOOM OUT CANCEL  button while holding down the    The main menu cannot be displayed in the recording control  FUNCTION  button changes the resolution of VGA output     mode or during recording       The recording control mode performs recording in accordance Q  ZOOM IN ENTER  Button          with the settings in the  Camera Record Setting  menu  Selects ZOOM OUT  t  Page 35  when PTZ mode is selected and   t  Page 53  selects a view in PRESET mode   Sets the selected values in the Main Menu window  Also  pressing    the  ZOOM IN ENTER  button while holding down the  FUNCTION       SELEC 1  Buttonindicator l Be button changes the resolution of VGA output   Use the    key to set to the camera selection mode  The indicator You can control the click action of the mouse when the software  lights up when the camera selection mode is set to on   rs Page 36  keyboard is displayed       Page 28   Press the  FUNCTION  button   ALARM CLEAR  button and the aay Ss   SELECT  button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well    Status indicators  as the internal distribution server  E  WARNING  Indicator      PTZ PRESET  Button Indicator Lights up when an error occurs   t  Page 151   Switches between the PTZ mode and PRESET mode of the  D key  Press and hold ihe  ALARM CLEAR  button to turn off the light   The mode changes each time the button is pressed  The indicator MI  ALARM  Indicator  lights up when PTZ mode is selected and blinks when PRESET Lights up 
250. sorgt werden soll  Stattdessen sollte das Produkt zur fachgerechten Entsorgung  Weiterverwendung und  Wiederverwertung in   bereinstimmung mit der Landesgesetzgebung einer entsprechenden Sammelstelle f  r  das Recycling elektrischer und elektronischer Ger  te zugef  hrt werden    Die korrekte Entsorgung dieses Produkts dient dem Umweltschutz und verhindert m  gliche Sch  den f  r die  Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit  welche durch unsachgem    e Behandlung des Produkts auftreten  k  nnen  Weitere Informationen zu Sammelstellen und dem Recycling dieses Produkts erhalten Sie bei Ihrer  Gemeindeverwaltung  Ihrem   rtlichen Entsorgungsunternehmen oder in dem Gesch  ft  in dem Sie das  Produkt gekauft haben    F  r die nicht fachgerechte Entsorgung dieses Abfalls k  nnen gem     der Landesgesetzgebung Strafen  ausgesprochen werden      Gesch  ftskunden     Wenn Sie dieses Produkt entsorgen m  chten  besuchen Sie bitte unsere Webseite www jvc europe com  um  Informationen zur R  cknahme des Produkts zu erhalten      Andere L  nder au  erhalb der Europ  ischen Union     Wenn Sie dieses Produkt entsorgen m  chten  halten Sie sich dabei bitte an die entsprechenden  Landesgesetze und andere Regelungen in Ihrem Land zur Behandlung elektrischer und elektronischer Ger  te        Erkl  rung zum Rauschen  f  r die Bundesrepublik Deutschland    Maschinenl  rminformations Verordunung 3  GPSGV  06 01 2004  Der h  chste  Schalldruckpegel betr  gt 70 dB A  oder weniger gem     EN ISO 7779  
251. ssign a stand alone viewer  application for  playing recorded images  to the data to be  exported    e  f you have selected  Database Export      you are able to  include a stand alone version of the viewer  application for  playing recorded images  to the data to be exported by  selecting the  Include Viewer Program Files  check box     Memo    e To view the exported data on a PC  double click the   Browser exe  file in the  Exported Images  folder of the USB  memory  CD R RW  or DVD R RW used for the export  It will  open the Viewer and you can view the exported data    e For details on the Viewer  refer to  Export Viewer   c  Page 138     e DB To include audio sound by exporting in the AVI format  open  the recorded image that has been exported in the DB format on  the Viewer  and export it again in the AVI format on the Viewer     Note     The  Database Export     format enables you to export audio    sound together  which is not possible when you export in the   AVI  or  JPEG  format       The recording frame rate may decline during export                 48       10 Specify the export destination  To write data to a CD DVD  select  CD                     HE NVR Viewer AVI   JPEG Export                Start Time        Thursday  July 05  2007 8 01 23 AM       End Time  Thursday  July 05  2007 8 02 24 AM       Source  UVC   Camera 3    Export Type    Export Format   Add Timestamp   Framerate     Digital Zoom Export       AVI Codec          Microsoft Video 1         CD  Ch
252. st switched on        1 Exit NVR Viewer    2 Select  Language Seiting  from the main menu    e The  Language Setting  screen appears when the NVR  Viewer is switched on for the first time     3 Select a language    e Click on the  Language Selection  pull down tab and  select the language you want to use     4 Click the  OK  button    e Click the  OK  button to enable your selection  The system  will reboot when the language setting is changed     x    Language Selection          3     ok    __   _         __ 4  i d   Language Selection  Screen    Note         e Specify the language settings immediately after this unit has  started up    e When language setting is complete  the device automatically  reboots  It may take about five minutes to exit the settings    e Set the language after shutting down the NVR Viewer    e Never turn off the power while setting the language        115    Applications    HDD Utility       This feature enables you to check the status of the hard disk  and  format  initialize   or defragment  eliminate fragmented space  it   The  Progress indicator  shows the progress of formatting and  defragmentation                Volume  Capacity  Available    OG       Quick F   i     6   Progress   HDD Utility  Screen                     Select  HDD Utility  from the main menu  e The  HDD Utility  screen appears  Specify the following       Item    Description          Defrag    Executes the defragmentation function to  eliminate fragmented files in the volume
253. stem is automatically  rebooted        Memo   e Selecting  OK  changes the color of the  OK  characters from  brown to orange        Automatic Registration of Cameras    After you have started up this unit for the first time and finished  selecting a language  the  Auto Detect  screen appears       Check to ensure that  Auto Detect  is selected   followed by pressing the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN   ENTER  button   k    The    Please wait       message appears    Memo          The characters of the selected item switches to orange color        IP Lease IP Infomation       Enable O Disable P Mac CH MAKER MODEL  ODelete IP Infomation  Oup  BIER Para nee  Start Address    192 168 0 100  ODown  Unit units v  SubnetMask 255 255 255 0  Gatoney  192 168 0 24  DNS Server  Primary  192 168 0 253   lt   gt   Secondry  192 168 0 22  OEntry  Domain Name   Tata Reserve MAC Address  ease Time Limit aR  No OYes  48hours v     Client  D Only Camera    Any Client OAdd ODel    Memo        e In the case of VR N900U  the analog input appears on the  Auto  Detect  screen from the start as the    Analog in    network  encoder  IP video server  of    192 168 201 12           2 Check to ensure that the camera is detected    e After the message disappears  a list of detected cameras  is displayed    e  f all the cameras are not detected  press the  Auto Detect   button again  If doing so does not solve the problem   check the connection with the cameras and the IP  address of the cameras     Enable O Disable
254. sword setting     Communication settin    TGP EVENT  UDP EVENT             Item    Description             Audio files    For specifying the audio file to play back and  number of playbacks when an event is  triggered    Specify the number of playbacks between     1times    and     10times     You can also select  continuous playback to enable infinite loop  playback  Leave the field blank if you do not  want to designate a playback audio file for a  specific event                  Start  Button on  the  Different  Pages     Audio files copy  Button     Starts up the  Audio file utility  screen    ee Page 129      Setting copy  Button    Starts up the  Setting copy  screen        Page 130     Password setting  Button    Starts up the  Password setting  screen    c  Page 130     Communication setting  Button     Starts up the  Communication setting   screen   rs Page 131                Audio  playing for   IPaddress    Displays a list of cameras or IP addresses  that are used as destinations of audio  playback files    Select a destination to play back audio files  when an event is triggered from the list   Select the check box of the camera to play  back audio sound    You can sort the list accordingly by clicking   Audio playing for  or  IP address            ush To Talk  ee                  be d  Item Description    Event A list of events that can be used with the    event audio are displayed    You can use up to a maximum of 100 events   including both  External Alarm Term
255. t are not to be detected as    motion     and  mark such areas to exclude them from  motion detection  As a large number of  images need to be analyzed during the  marking operation  it may take a while to  complete after you have clicked the  Auto   button          Show Grid   Select this check box to enable the display of  grids on the preview image  The default          setting is  Show Grid            e To clear the exclusion areas  right click and drag the mouse  pointer to move the grid        104    Note    e Note that when motion detection is set at short intervals  the  number of alarms may increase and a longer search time may  be required during playback    e When a camera is connected  flickers such as those of a  fluorescent light may cause a false motion detection  In this  case  set the camera to flickerless      Noises in the camera image may also trigger a false detection   Set the camera to prevent false detection even when the ACG  function is enabled  such as during nighttime           Specifying Motion Detection     Motion detection enables you to specify the timing to transfer  images from the camera  generate alerts  and trigger external  outputs  lights or sirens      Note    e This feature is essential to the system   s operation  In order to  avoid unnecessary alerts during application  it is recommended  that you specify the settings for each camera carefully   Depending on the physical location where the camera is  installed  it may be necessary to
256. t assign a camera number that is used by other cameras  If  the camera numbers overlap  the camera may not function  properly        60    Screen Setup    Screen Display  Groups and Views     Multi view setting for multiple cameras is referred to as  Views   All  views are placed in folders called  Groups      Memo   e  Groups  can be private or shared   e  Private  folder   Views in this folder can only be accessed by the user  who created them   e  Shared  folder   Views in this folder can be accessed by all remote PC  users with access to the system    e Page 61  Creating Groups and Views             Views  Section                         EF Shared     Default Group   4  O  Default View   e Entrance  u    E Private           Screen Setup   Screen     System Overview  Section  2  3  2   x     Shortcut         Delete  Button    Rename  Button    Create New View  Button   Create New Group  Button    Note      The default user setting is    Administrator         The Default View created by the Auto Detect feature may  change the camera placement in the view  To maintain a fixed  position  name the view and save it      When changing the view of the  Shared  folder  the  Save View  Group Error  screen may sometimes appear  In this case  click  the  OK  button to close the screen  log out from the  NVR  Viewer  once  c  Page 125   and log in again to repeat the  procedures for changing the view        Save ViewGroup Error    A Failed to save data for the ViewGroup Shared  ViewGr
257. t priority    o             Event rule string  Event substring        Event message include                  Add New Event  Screen    General Event settings       Item Description       Event Name For specifying a name for the event  Enter a    unique name for the event     Memo     The following characters cannot be used  as part ofthe event name    lt   gt   amp  48217 48220     7 1               Event Protocol For selecting the protocol that this unit uses    to receive data when detecting the event              Any Receives and analyzes data that uses either  the TCP or UDP protocol    TCP Receives and analyzes only data that uses  the TCP protocol    UDP Receives and analyzes only data that uses    the UDP protocol        Event rule type For specifying the rules when analyzing the    received data        Match In order for an event to be triggered  the  received data must totally coincide with the  message specified in the  Event message  include  field of the  Event rules string   section    and must not contain any other  messages        Search In order for an event to be triggered  the  received data must contain the message  specified in the  Event message include  field  of the  Event rules string  section     Other  messages may be included in the data           Event priority The same data may be used by different  events  Assigns the order of priority to each  event for determining the event to trigger  when the received data matches the criteria  of multiple eve
258. th the actual time        Timeline  Display ON  Time Display  OFF Button Pointer        Timeline Browser     Hi Timeline Colors and Lines    The timeline of the camera selected in the view is highlighted in a  lighter color           Red Indicates recordings of motion detection or  events    Pink when highlighted     Green Shows recordings before and after motion  is detected      Light green when highlighted         Black Indicates the period during which there is  no recording    Gray when highlighted         Center White Line   Time Display  Pointer     Shows the time of the displayed image                 44    Memo      The items under the timeline browser enable you to specify the  time span to display on the timeline  1 hour  2 hours    1 day    and whether to set the time flow from top to bottom or bottom to  top by using the  Newest images at top  check box  These  settings will not be saved  They will be lost each time the NVR  Viewer is rebooted    e If your mouse has a scroll wheel  you can also use the scroll  wheel for browsing the timelines      Double click on any point within the timeline to display image at  the desired point in time    e When you do not need the timeline browser  you can hide it by  Clicking the  Display ON OFF  button at the center of the timeline  browser s left edge     Note     e A portion of the timeline may not be refreshed if you drag the  timeline up and down using the mouse  In this case  reboot the  NVR Viewer     e Page 33       
259. the camera is not a PTZ camera  pressing the  button will have no effect     Memo    e  f you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer  over the image from a PTZ camera  then you are able to control  the orientation ofthe camera using point and click control on the  image screen  Control of the camera on the image screen is not  possible if the mouse pointer does not change to the cross  shape pointer  The mouse pointer may not change to the cross   shape pointer depending on the type of the PTZ camera  Control  of the PTZ camera may not be possible for some PTZ cameras  even though the mouse pointer changes to the cross shape  pointer  In this case  use the PTZ navigation button of the  PTZ  Control  section to control the PTZ camera      The mouse pointer does not change to the cross shape pointer  for analog cameras that are connected to the network encoder   IP video server   e g  VN E4         f your mouse is equipped with a scroll wheel  you can use it to  control the zoom in and out function on the PTZ camera    e When using electronic zoom feature on VN C625U VN C655U   Zooming will stop at the boundary between optical zoom and  electronic zoom  To continue zooming  perform zoom operation  again              37    Basic Operation       Viewing Live Images via  Mouse Control  continued     Viewing Images Using the PTZ Features   continued     E Digital Zoom    By selecting the  Digital Zoom  check box in the  PTZ Control   section  you are able to use di
260. the name of the camera          Set All    Selects the check box for all cameras        Clear All    Clears the check box for all cameras              Set all paths       Not used             The recorded images may be interrupted for several seconds  when archiving starts        Memo      f audio is enabled during recording  audio data from the device  will also be archived        108          E Setting Items and Buttons                                  Item Description   Time to add   For specifying the archiving time    Add Adds the archiving time specified in the   Time to add  field to the   Daily archiving  times    list    Delete Removes a selected archiving time from the  list    D Daily Lists specified archiving times  Archiving  archiving takes place everyday at the specified time   times   Memo        e NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network   In the case of this unit  you can specify NAS as a drive for  archiving data    e For details on the NAS drive settings  refer to the  Details  item  under  HDD Utility        Page 117     Note          When other operations  e g   startup of Live Viewing  overlap  with the startup of the archiving process  up to 3 seconds of the  recording may be lost       Set the interval of performing achieving to more than 1 hour    e Do not specify the same NAS drive for multiple cameras  If there  is an insufficient number of NAS drives to be specified for each  camera  divide the NAS drive into multiple partit
261. the software  Instead   contact JVC to determine its return policy for a refund or credit     If you comply with these license terms  you have the rights below     use Rights   You may use the software on the device with which you acquired the software     2 Additional Licensing Requirements and or Use Rights   a Specific Use   JVC designed this device for a specific use  You may only use the software for that use   b Other Software   You may use other programs with the software as long as the other programs    e Directly support the manufacturer    s specific use for the device  or  e Provide system utilities  resource management  or anti virus or similar protection     Software that provides consumer or business tasks or processes may not be run on the device  This includes email  word  processing  spreadsheet  database  scheduling and personal finance software  The device may use terminal services  protocols to access such software running on a server     c Device Connections   e You may use terminal services protocols to connect the device to another device running business task or processes  software such as email  word processing  scheduling or spreadsheets   e You may allow up to ten other devices to access the software to use  e File Services   e Print Services   e Internet Information Services  and  e Internet Connection Sharing and Telephony Services     The ten connection limit applies to devices that access the software indirectly through    multiplexing    or oth
262. therefore  be paid when handling it       Precautions During Installation and Change of Installation  Location    Moving of this unit or installation work is strictly prohibited  when the power of this unit is on or immediately after the  power is turned off  approximately 1 minute   The HDD  continues to move under its own inertia for some time  after the power is disconnected  and exertion of vibration  or impact during this interval may result in HDD failure   When moving this unit  wrap it using cushioning materials  to protect it from external shock       Handling Precautions      Handle this unit carefully without exerting vibration or  impact on it    e Do not remove the power plug during recording or  playback  or when the HDD is being accessed      The HDD is a consumable product  Although it may vary  according to the environment of use  it is recommended to  replace the HDD after using for 18 000 hours in a  surrounding temperature of 25  C   However  this is only a  reference time and not a quaranty for HDD life span    For  inquiries on maintenance plans and expenses  consult  your nearest JVC dealers       When installing an external hard disk  we recommend the  use of UPS  uninterruptible power supply  to ensure the  stable operation of the system   Connecting a UPS         Page 132      Power failure that occurs during formatting or  disconnection of the HDD may affect its subsequent use  even when the UPS is connected      JVC shall not be held responsible fo
263. tien importantes au  sujet desquelles des renseignements se trouvent       WARNING    TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  SHOCK  DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO  RAIN OR MOISTURE    CAUTION    Please use this unit in an appropriate power source   To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards  DO NOT  use any other power source     ATTENTION     dans le manuel d   instructions       Ces symboles ne sont utilises qu   aux Etats Unis              NOTE     The rating plate  serial number plate  is on the rear of the unit   VR N900U   The rating plate  serial number plate  is on the top of the unit      VR N1600U E     AVERTISSEMENT    POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D   INCENDIE OU  D   ELECTROCUTION  NE PAS EXPOSER  L   APPAREIL A L   HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE     Veuillez employer cette unit   dans une source d   nergie  appropri  e    Afin d     viter tout resque d   incendie ou d     lectrocution  ne pas  utiliser d   autres sources d   alimentation   lectrique           INFORMATION     This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  for a Class A digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules   These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a  commercial environment    This equipment generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency  energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the  instruction manual  may cause harmful interference to radio  communications    Operation of
264. tification    Enables notification by e mails to be sent out when an alarm or  motion is detected     2    Display and distribution performance at 80 ips  is guaranteed  VR N1600U E     Supports RAID1  VR N1600U E     Adding a built in HDD enables support for RAID1    RAID1 writes the same data to two hard disks simultaneously   mirroring   so that one of them remains usable when the other  breaks down     Simultaneous recording up to 16 channels at  160 ips  VR N1600U E     Simultaneous recording up to 16 channels at 240 ips is possible  when NVR Viewer is not started up     Supports cameras that allow bidirectional audio  transmission  VR N1600U E     Microphone audio that is input into the AUDIO IN 1 terminal is  transmitted to the camera that supports bidirectional audio  transmission  and output from the speakers connected to the camera     How to Read this Manual    E Documents  There are two documents on this unit      1  Startup Guide    This comes in a booklet together with this product  It is  also available in the PDF file format  You can find it in the  CD ROM provided      2  Instruction Manual  PDF     This manual is available in the PDF file format  You can  find it in the CD ROM provided     i Symbols Used in this Manual  Caution Precautions to take during operation of this unit     Notes Details for reference  such as functions and  restrictions on uses     icy Page or item to refer to     E Content of this Manual      The copyright of this manual belongs to 
265. tifications     button       Camera Settings for  JVC   N C625  Camera 3    Speedup Settings Live Settings  Desired framerate   Desired Framerate      8 frame s per second v  0 13 Second s  btw  images    Same as recording      Same as speedup   Recording Settings   Desired framerate    Camera Monitor Setup    0 13 Second s  btw  images f                     e    frame s  per    T Enable speedup A   r E E   E T Disabled    When to store images in database    Audio source    tion  f ae  none      Conditionally     3 seconds pre post recordings on motionfevent          Database Settings    ically when database is Full             In case of database Failure the following action should be taken   archive  no repair   Motion Detection Settings Exclude Regions Settings    Motion Detection    Motion Color      Exclude Regions    Region Color             Image Quality    Se Outputs                       Camera Settings   Screen    3 Select the event to trigger notification from   Available Events     4 Click the  _    button    The selected event is copied to  Active Events      Setup Notifications on Events  Setup notifications for camera NCO C  Notifications on Events    Active Events               Setup Notifications on Events  Screen    102    5 Repeat 2 to 4 for each event    e To delete an event for which notification has been  configured  select the event and click the Ka button     Specifying an Output Port    A specific event or manual button can be associated with a  parti
266. ting    23 Camera Recording Administrator                    Device Manager       F BR AXIS 207W  192 168 0 5     RA AXIS 212 PTZ  192 168 0 2    8 WC  192 168 0 20       s  NVR  127 0 0 1     D Service Manager          Add Device    E       2        Scheduler                3          _ General Settings        D  D    Archive Setup     Li 5  I O Setup          Event Buttons    i    Generic Events       I O Control    Il _    Service Manager    Recording Server running    Memo    e  f you are configuring the  PTZ Preset Positions     settings  from the  Settings     button  3   do so after stopping the  recording server temporarily using this menu   c amp  Page 90           84                                                                                  Item Description Reference  Page   D Service Manager    Pressing the  Service Manager     button opens a small  Service Manager  screen  which   t  Page 90  enables you to pause resume the    Recording Server    recording program   Use this feature when you need to pause the program  such as when configuring PTZ  cameras      Scheduler    Displays the  Scheduler     screen  re Page 53     General Settings    Displays the  General Settings  screen  r  Page 106      Archive Setup    Displays the  Archive Setup  screen  r  Page 108       Import DLKs    Not used          Matrix    Settings for using the Milestone XProtect Matrix by Milestone Systems  Zu  Memo   e For details  refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User   
267. tings   and click  Set     4 Enter the IP address and shared name of the  NAS device in the format of    YYIP Address     shared name    in the  Address  field under  NAS  Drive   followed by clicking  Add     Example      192 168 0 200      5 If the NAS device is the only device for  recording images  deselect the  Enable  archiving to internal HDD  check box    6 Click  Close      HDD Utility  Screen    ODefrag       ann ee a       NAS User Settings    User name    Password    NAS Drive  Address     Auto Archive        Enable archiving to internal HDD                7 Click  Main Menu   Camera Record Setting     Archive Setup          Page 108        The  Archive Setup  screen appears     8 Deselect the  Automatic path selection  check  box       Archive setup    F Daily archiving times  Time to add     Delete databases in the backup directory older than    9999 days  12 00 00  05 44 03        Add    Delete      Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply    name    AXIS 207W  C     AXIS 212 PTZ  c   Dye Jc    Automatic path selection             Set all paths           Archive Setup  Screen    9 Configure each drive as destinations for storing  images of the respective cameras     Note    e Performing the above setting only after the NAS device setting is  complete and when the device is connected to the network    e If you change the archive destination after applying the setting   playback of previously archived data will fail      The configurable items
268. tly higher  or lower                 56             Item Preset Values    Description          Recording Settings  continued        Enable speedup On motion  On event    Enables you to specify whether to execute recording with a higher maximum frame rate when  motion is detected or when an event occurs    When  On event  is selected    Specify the starting and ending events in the  Start  and  Stop  fields respectively    The speedup recording frame rate uses the  Frame Rate  in the  Speedup Settings   item        When to store Always  images in Never    er   Conditionally       Always   Select this check box to record images at all times     Never   Do not perform recording in the recording control mode  Record  starts when the  REC STOP  button is pressed    Enables you to specify the recording conditions in recording control mode  If you have   selected  Conditionally   specify the following fields as well    On motion   Select this check box to record all images for which motion has been  detected     On event   Select this check box to record all images from the occurrence of an  event until the next event occurs regardless of motion  Specify the  starting and ending events in the  Start  and  Stop  fields  respectively        Memo   e For details on events  refer to  Camera Input Output Port and Events   rs Page 95         Note    e The  ALARM  indicator on the front panel lights up regardless of the recording status when  the motion or event specified in  When to store
269. to 80    Power Supply   AC 120   240 V  50 Hz 60 Hz  Power Consumption     1 7A   Mass   Approx  8 0 kg  E Interface  Network   RJ 45x2  LAN1   1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T  LAN2   100BASE TX 10BASE T  Serial   USB2 0 A type  or equivalent  x 5  VGA Output   Up to 1600x1200  Video Input   NTSC PAL composite video   75 Q  BNC unbalanced  x 4  Audio Input   Analog audio RCA x 2     8 dBs 10 kQ  Unbalanced     Audio Output   Analog audio RCA x 1   8 dBs 600 Q  Unbalanced     I O Terminals   Push terminal  Input x 8  Output x 5  GND x 3    E Compression Format    Video   JPEG MPEG 4  Network camera   JPEG  Analog camera    Audio   H law  64 kbps  A D 8 bits  Fs   8 kHz   E Recording    HDD Capacity   250 GB x 1  E Recording Displaying live images Distribution  performance  When viewing live images on NVR    Up to 120 ips 60 ips 30 ips  When not viewing live images on NVR      Up to 120 ips O ips 82 ips  when NVR  Viewer is not started up     When using NAS  When viewing live images on NVR     Up to 60 ips 60 ips 30 ips  When not viewing live images on NVR     Up to 60 ips O ips 30 ips    E Attachments Accessories    Start up Guide              uernsernennneenneennnnnn 1  CD ROM    1  Power Cord  2m  seeren 1  Rack Mount Bracket           222 ee 2  Warranty Card      uueesnnnersenensnnnnnnnn nennen 1  Service Information Card                      1  Screw  M4 X 10 mm                en 4  Screw  M5x 11 mm     4    E Dimensional Outline Drawing  Unit  mm                           
270. to Detect Setting    Camera Record Setting          Exit     Operation  1  Up   Down Enter  Enter Cancel   Exit    Note       Settings in the  Password  sections  c  Page 69  in  OS  Setting     Page 72    Language Setting   and  Unit Setting  of  the  Main Menu  will not be initialized           117    Applications       Distribution Settings   Details     User Administration    This section describes procedures to configure user accounts and  rights     E User Settings    After the  User Administration  screen appears  you are able to  define individual users and their passwords  There are two ways to  add new users     User administration    Current users groups       User   R vente00          Add Basic User    Add Windows User                 Add Basic User        Add new user    User info       Usemame           Password           You can create a dedicated user account for the  surveillance system through authentication of the user  name and password       Add Windows User        Select Users or Groups    Select this object type     Users or Groups    Object Types       Erom this location    VR N1600    Enter the object names to select  examples         118       Note        e Do not select this option  For details  consult your system    administrator     e   f the  Host Name  in  OS Setting  has been changed  enter     Administrator    in  Enter the object names to select  on the   Serect Users or Groups  screen  and click the  Advanced      button  Next  click the  O
271. ton     Main Menu      Unit Setting     OS Setting     Flash Memory Utility     HDD Utility     Event Audio Setting     Language Setting     Return to default settings    Image Server Setting      Live Viewing      Auto Detect Setting    Camera Record Setting      Exit     Operation  1 Up J Down Enter  Enter Cancel  Exit        Main Menu  VR N1600U E     Main Menu      Unit Setting     OS Setting     Flash Memory Utility    HDD Utility     Language Setting     Image Server Setting      Live Viewing    Auto Detect Setting    Camera Record Setting      Exit     Operation  T Up   Down Enter Enter Cancel   Exit        Main Menu  VR N900U     3 Select an item    e Select the required item using the  2 4  or  10 0 4  8     button and specify the settings  Mk   e Press the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button to save  the settings  and press the  13 CANCEL  ZOOM OUT   CANCEL  button to close the screen and return to the  main menu    ik    Memo   e To exit the main menu  press the  13 CANCEL  ZOOM OUT   CANCEL  button    ik    Note    e In some occasions  the NVR Viewer may appear instead when  you try to display the main menu while the NVR Viewer is  running  In this case  press the  LIVE BROWSE  button on the  front panel and perform the operation to display the main menu  again                      For details on the main menu settings  refer to   Main Menu List   c  Page 68               NVR Viewer      You can view live and recorded images using the NVR Viewer     e NVR Viewer can 
272. ton until the timer event is triggered  Specify  after  the time interval in seconds or minutes                 97    Applications       Camera Input Output Port  and Events  continued     Specifying an Output      Select the camera for specifying the event from  the  Defined events  list on the  I O Setup   screen    2 Click the  Add new output event     button       Defined events     AXIS 207W          AXIS 212 PTZ      NVR        Add new event      Add new output event     Add VMD Event  Motion Detection       Advanced                                     Add New Output          External output connected to   JVC VN C20 1  Output connected on    Output 1 x    2   Keep output for    5   1 10 second s     C Seconds    3  External output name     4    lt     Cancel           Add new output  Screen    3 Specify the output connection destination   output holding time  and output name       Note      The  Add new output event     button is disabled if there is no  output available for use by the network camera           Item Description       External Displays the device name for which  output output is specified   This is a read only  connected to   field                 N     Output For selecting which destination to  connected on   connect the output to                 3  Keep output For specifying the output holding time in  for units of 1 10 seconds or seconds   4  External For specifying a name for the output     output name Memo           The following characters cannot b
273. tored to    No Audio Sources    when you  return from the setting screen to  Live   Select the parameters  again           Select a Camera  Select the camera image that you want to view as follows       Press the  SELECT  button  e The  SELECT  indicator lights up     2 Enter the camera number with the keypad    e Enter using the  1  to  16  keys in the case of VR N1600U   E  and  0  to  9  in the case of VR N900U     Memo     You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing   10 0  followed by a number from  10 0  to  9    VR N1600U E      You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing   0  followed by a number from  0  to  9   Numbers from 20 cannot   be selected   VR N900U             When you have selected a camera  the blue bar at the top  of each live image changes to a lighter blue tone    e Each bar comes with a tri color square indicator  which  indicates the following features  as well as characters that  indicate the operating status of the camera                    DE     Live  Screen    Memo           Event indicator  Left  yellow   Lights up when events specified in the  Camera Record  Setting  occur  The indicator appears black if event  indication has not been specified for the camera in  question  or if no specified event has occurred       Motion indicator  Center  red   Lights up when motion is detected       Online indicator  Right  green   Blinks every time an image is received from the camera        Operating status of the camer
274. tput sound alert when an event  related to the camera occurs    Always on Outputs a sound alert each time an event  related to the camera occurs           Apply To   Press this button to apply the new settings to             All all cameras        Note        e Set this unit such that the total distribution frame rate to all  surveillance computers does not exceed 80 ips  VR N1600U E    30 ips  VR N900U       The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the  picture quality  Changing the  Image Quality  settings may affect  the recording performance  As such  use this function with the  value fixed at    Full         When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during  playback  the frame rate setting is disabled   Searching  Recorded Image Using the Timeline Browser   rs Page 44      Notification sound is not output from this unit during motion  detection or occurrence of an event  This function is for use by  the NVR Viewer  which is downloaded onto the surveillance  computer        4 To adjust the settings on other cameras  repeat  Steps 2 to 3    Memo    e To adjust the settings of all cameras at once  click the  Apply To  All  button  The new camera settings will be applied to all  cameras in the view           64    Using Your Views on Different Computers    User settings  including the  Private  view  are stored on this unit  In  other words  you can use your  Private  views on any surveillance  computer that has this unit and the    NVR Viewer    insta
275. tup Wizard    say  Wireless Network Setup Wizard       3 Select the network to which NVR is connected       Network Connections    File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help    Back     45   PD search Folders 5   gt  7 i   33     Address   Network Connections       A  LAN or High Speed Internet    Network Tasks     E  Create anew  connection      Set up a home or small  office network    ocal Area Connection     Change Windows Acquiring network  Firewall settings Disable     Disable this network Status  device 2    amp  Repair this connection tae      Rename this connection       View status of this    Bridge Connections    Create Shortcut    Rename       4 Right click and select  Properties     5 Check to ensure that both the  Cliant for  Microsoft Networks  and  Internet Protocol TCP   IP   check boxes are selected        Local Area Connection Properties    General   Authentication   Advanced       Connect using    S9 Realtek RTL8169 8110 Family Gigab  This connection uses the following items      Sei   M JS File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks    M  8  005 Packet Scheduler  M   Internet Protocol  TCP IP        Install Jf Uninstall    Properties       Description    Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft  network        Show icon in notification area when connected  Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity                               OK Cancel    6 Select  Internet Protocol TCP IP   and click the   Properties  button    I
276. ty    checks to determine that the appliance is in safe operating condition     SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  for USA     RISK OF ELECTRIC  SHOCK DO NOT OPEN       CAUTION  TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK   DO NOT REMOVE COVER  OR BACK    NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE   REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL       The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol  within an  equilateral triangle  is intended to alert the user to  the presence of uninsulated    dangerous voltage     within the product s enclosure that may be of  sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  shock to persons     The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is  intended to alert the user to the presence of  important operating and maintenance  servicing   instructions in the literature accompanying the  appliance     RISQUE D   ELECTROCU   TION NE PAS OUVRIR       ATTENTION  POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D   ELECTROCUTION  NE PAS OUVRIR LE BOITER   AUCUNE PIECE INTERIEURE N   EST  A REGLER PAR L UTILISATEUR   SE REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE EN CAS DE PROBLEME     Le symbole de l   Eclair a l   interieur d un triangle    quilat  ral est destin   a alerter l   utilisateur sur la  presence d   une    tension dangereuse    non isol amp e  dans le boitier du produit  Cette tension est  suffisante pour provoquer l   electrocution de  personnes     Le point d   exclamation a lint  rieur d un triangle    quilat  ral est destin   a alerter l   utilisateur sur la  presence d   operations d   entre
277. ty laws  and treaties  Note that the Software is licensed  not sold     1  Grant of Use   Milestone hereby grants you the right to use the Software on JVC s NVR products     2  Copyright   All title  including but not limited to copyrights  in and to the Software and any copies thereof are owned by Milestone  All  rights not expressively granted are reserved by Milestone     3  No Warranties    Milestone and JVC expressly disclaims any warranty for the Software  The Software and any related documentation is  provided  as is  without warranty of any kind  either express or implied  including  without limitation  the implied warranties  of merchantability  fitness for a particular purpose or non infringement  The entire risk and liability arising out of use or  performance of the Software remains with you as the user  You are notified that the Software  when used with certain  equipment or other software  may enable you to perform surveillance actions and data processing which are likely to be  restricted by or contrary to applicable law  including without limitation data privacy and criminal law  The sole responsibility  for verification of your use against compliance with applicable law lies with you as the user     4  Limitation of Liability    The provisions of this paragraph are in effect to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law  In no event shall  Milestone  JVC or their suppliers be liable for any special  incidental  indirect  or consequential damages whatsoeve
278. ubsequent operations           External Hard Disk Drives    You can connect an external hard disk drive to the serial terminal at  the rear of this unit  External hard disk drives can be combined with  this unit in the following ways  Combinations other than those below  are not possible     e 500 GB  1 unit    e 1 TB  1 unit    e 1 TB  1 unit    2 TB  1 unit   e 2 TB  1 unit    e 2 TB  up to 2 units     Connecting the External Hard Disk Drive      Press and hold the  OPERATE  button for  about2 seconds to turn off the power    2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel       Note      Make sure that you turn off the power switch        3 Connect the external hard disk drive to the   SERIAL  port on the rear panel  and switch on  the power      Make sure that you switch on the power to the external  hard disk drive before switching on this unit  The system  may not recognize the external drive if it is not switched on  beforehand     4 Switch on the power of this unit      If recording is in progress  a  New HDD was found  Are  you OK to stop recording and format new HDD    confirmation message appears        New HDD was found  Are you OK to stop recording and  format new HDD           e Upon clicking  OK   a multipartition confirmation screen  appears   Only when the VR D series is used        VR D series was detected     Set Multipartition     CANCEL          e Click  OK  to start multipartition  The HDD Utility starts up  automatically      Page 116   e Use each of the 
279. uired devices  such as network cameras or network encoders   IP video servers   to the system  Devices have their own IP  addresses and host names  The system identifies the devices  based on their IP address or host name        Memo   e Even though each device is managed using a unique IP address  or host name  in cases such as when multiple analog cameras  are connected to a network encoder  IP video server   a multiple   number of cameras may be connected to a single device and  thus share the same IP address or host name  Although several  cameras are connected to one device in this case  this unit  manages the cameras on an individual basis    e In addition to the network camera and network encoder  IP video  server   you can also add a number of dedicated I O  input   output  devices to the system  You can configure and use the  event settings for the I O devices in the same way as cameras    e When a device is added to the system  it is listed on the  Camera  Recording Administator  screen  To add a new device  follow the  procedure below  Firstly  configure the IP address and password  of the device according to instructions in the camera manual    e You cannot add a camera for which there is user access  restriction  For details on access restrictions  refer to the  camera   s    Instruction Manual          f the camera is registered with the user access restriction set to  ON  the camera is registered with access restriction and unable  to display live images unless
280. ule if motion is detected  Not Selected           146                         Motion Detection  Specifying Motion Detection        Page 104                                                                                               Sensitivity  40    Motion Sensitivity  640   General Settings  General Settings       Page 106    Milestone XProtect Central Settings   Enable Milestone XProtect Central Connections  Not Selected   Patrolling Settings   Resume Patrol after Manual or Event PTZ sec    30    Logfile Settings   Logfile Path  L   Log  MS   Days to log  5    Event Recording Settings   Path  D   Events     Days to keep  5   Advanced      Don t send e mail on camera failures  Not Selected   Start cameras on remote live requests  Selected   Create default schedule for new cameras  Selected   E Mail settings   Enable E mail Monitor   Not Selected   Archive Setup  Archiving       Page 108    Delet databases in the backup directory older then     days  9999    Send email on archive error  Selected   Automatic path selection  Selected   Daily archiving times  12 00 00   Name All  Selected                 Camera   s  Properties  Adjusting Camera Settings       Page 63        Image Quality        Full   Super High for megapixel   High    Medium  Low             Frame Rate  Unlimited   Medium  Low  Maintain Image Aspect Ration  Selected   Update on motion only  Not Selected        Sound on Event     Always off   Always on       Sound on Event           Always off   Always on    
281. up       Event Buttons   Event Buttons           1O Control                          Camera Recording Administator  Screen    2 Select  Global   apply to all cameras  or a  specific camera    3 Click  Add new event     to add the event button             Event Buttons  Defined events       A  Global  IA   AXIS 207W  Camera 2  A   EXIS 212 PTZ  Camera 3  IA  UVC VN C20  Camera 1   A   NVR  Camera 17  IA   NVR  Camera 18          Add New Event         Button related to   Global D  Manual event name       D    E Mail settings  I Send e mail if this event occurs             Cancel   Add New Event  Screen             Item Description   D Button related   Displays the camera name for which the  to event is specified   This is a read only  field        Manual event For specifying a name for the event  name button   Memo          The following characters cannot be  used as part of the event name    lt   gt   amp  48217  8220      1               E Mail settings    Send e mail if this   Select this check box to send an e mail  event occurs alert when the event button is clicked           Include image from   Select this check box to attach the  camera currently recorded images to the e mail  when the event button is clicked  Select  a camera from the list below the check  box                    Memo   e To specify a timer event for an event  select the event added in  Step 3  and click  Add new event               99    Applications       Camera Input Output Port  and Events  continue
282. uts        A registered input output port can be linked to an event as  described below   sPage 102  Specifying an Output Port      e Events can be used to start recording  send e mails  move the  PTZ camera to a preset position  and control the output port of  the device  Events are divided into the four types as described  below        Input events Registers input signals of sensors connected  to the input port of the device as an  Input    events         Generic events Registers as a generic event        VMD events Registers the detected image motion as a    VMD  Video Motion Detection  event        Event buttons Event generated by buttons that enable    manual operation                 Item Description      Add new For specifying input events for the device  event    selected in the  Defined events  list  You  may be able to specify multiple input  events for some devices   Click the     mark next to the device in the   Defined events  list  select the preset  input event  and click the  Add new  event     button to specify a timer event               t  Page 97     Add new Displays the  Add new output  screen   output event           Page 98      Add VMD For specifying a VMD  Video Motion    Event Motion   Detection  event for the device selected in                O Settings    1 Click the  I O Setup     button on the  Camera  Record Setting  screen       The  I O Setup  screen appears      The  I O Setup  screen enables you to add input events   VMD events and outputs t
283. vailable for the network camera              Specifying Timer Events    You can add a timer event to an added event    A timer event is defined with respect to an input event and is  triggered by that event  Timer events are triggered when the  specified time interval has lapsed after occurrence of the input  event at the preset destination       Select the event for adding a timer event from  the  Defined events  list on the  I O Setup   screen   An example of adding a timer event to the input  event        Defined events     NVR     Set output Option Out high     Set output Option Du  low     Set output Option Out  high       ut Option Dut2 low     Rising signal on input Alarm 1  Alert Event     Falling signal on input Alarm 1  Alert Event    KA Rising signal on input Alarm 2  Alert Event     Add new event  Edit selected        Remove selectes             Advanced         VO Setup  Screen    2 Click the  Add new event     button    The  New Timer  screen appears           New Timer          Timer event occurs after            Minutes     0   Seconds     New Timer  Screen    3 Specify the timer interval and timer event name                 Item Description     Timer Displays the event or event button name for  event is which a timer event is added   This is a read   started only field    by      Timer For specifying a name for the timer event   event  name      Timer For specifying the time interval from the  event occurrence of the event or clicking of the event  occurs but
284. when an alarm is activated   mode is selected  Goes off when the  ALARM CLEAR  button is pressed      SERIAL  Terminal ME  HDD  Indicator ora  For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse Lights up wnen the built in hard disk drive is accessed    sold separately   flash memory  sold separately  or UPS  sold W  LOCK  Indicator  separately   Lights up when operation is locked   rs Page 22   Memo       FUNCTION  Button    e Use the  SERIAL1 to 4  port on the rear panel for additional hard    disk drive connection   r  Page 14  Press the  FUNCTION  together with another button to use the    corresponding features     Special Key Operations       Page 134    Press the  FUNCTION  button   ALARM CLEAR  button and the   SELECT  button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well  as the internal distribution server        16          SEARCH  Button   Displays the date and time search screen when in the playback  mode       Page 40       KEY  Button    When  KEY  button is pressed while pressing  FUNCTION  button   key operation on front panel will be disabled   Key locked mode   To disable  perform same procedure again    Press to display or hide the    software keyboard        Memo           Use the software keyboard to input characters   ce Page 28           ALARM CLEAR  Button    Clears the  ALARM  display when an event occurs or motion is  detected  Press and hold this button to turn off the  WARNING   indicator    Press the  FUNCTION  button   ALARM CLEAR  
285. witch the view frequently within a short time interval      When live images do not appear on VN C625U VN C655U  set  the password for connecting VN C625U VN C655U on the  camera unit as well as this unit again  For details on the setting  procedures  refer to the  INSTRUCRTIONS  of the camera in  use and procedures for setting the root password on the  Edit  device settings  screen in this manual      Page 87       Setting of the  Audio  section is restored to    No Audio Sources     when you return from the setting screen to  Browse   Select the  parameters again           Searching Recorded Image Using a  Specific Date Time    You can search for and play back images by specifying a date and  time using the  SEARCH  button on the front panel       Press the  SEARCH  button on the  Browse   screen      The date and time input screen appears     year month day       Date  b7  07 05    hour minute second                Time  08 56     er  Go To  Button    2 Use the keypad to enter the search date and  time  e Use the  SKIP  button  4 or  gt     to select an item and  input accordingly     3 Press the  16 ENTER  ZOOM IN ENTER  button   ik      The view in the image display screen on the right jumps to  the selected date and time     Memo    e You can also jump to the selected date time by clicking the  Go  To  button    e When you are using the software keyboard  click the  Go To   button              Playing  Skipping and Stopping Recorded  Images    Control using the  PLAY   
286. with recording during playback near the current time    e When recording is set to be triggered by motion event   c  Page 57   recording will not start unless a motion event  occurs  During playback near the current time  however  the  image that is not recorded will also be played          Stopping     Press the  STOP PB   button    Playback stops      Enlarging a Display    e Entering the number of the selected camera switches to an  enlarged display    e To return to normal display  enter the camera number of the  enlarged display     41    Basic Operation       Playing Back Recorded  Images via Mouse Control    This section describes the procedures for viewing recorded images  by controlling the mouse        Notes       The recording frame rate may decline when you are using the   Browse  screen      When access to the hard disk occurs frequently  such as when  recording and playback of recorded images are performed  simultaneously  the playback image may pause and the audio  sound may be interrupted   This has no impact on recording to  the system or additional hard disk       The audio setting is restored to    No Audio Sources    when you  return from the setting screen to  Browse   Set the audio  parameters again       Set the time zone of the PC to the same time zone as this unit   If recorded images are viewed on a PC with a different time  zone  the time displayed on the recorded images of this unit  will be converted to the time in the PC   s time zone    e When t
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Télécharger  島津原子吸光分光光度計 制御ソフトウェア WizAArd インストール手順書  Electric water heaters Scaldacqua elettrici  chroma-q db4 - Point Source Productions Ltd  Cables Direct CDEX-235  EW-7438RPn Snelstartgids  Multifunction Process Calibrator  Washing Machine  Stanton C.402      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file